co.

Table of Contents

s.

Summary

s.­1

The Bhaiṣajyavastu, “The Chapter on Medicines,” is a part of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, the corpus of monastic law of one of the most influential Buddhist schools in India. This chapter deals with monastic regulations about medicines. At the same time, it also includes various elements not restricted to such rules: stories of the Buddha and his disciples, a lengthy story of the Buddha’s journey for the purpose of quelling an epidemic and converting a nāga, a number of stories of the Buddha’s former lives narrated by the Buddha himself, and a series of verses recited by the Buddha and his disciples about their former lives. Thus, this chapter preserves not only interesting information about medical knowledge shared by ancient Indian Buddhist monastics but also an abundance of Buddhist narrative literature.

ac.

Acknowledgements

ac.­1

This text was translated by the Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team. Fumi Yao translated the Tibetan text into English and prepared the ancillary materials. Shayne Clarke proofread the translation and ancillary materials.

The translation has been completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha.


ac.­2

We gratefully acknowledge the generous sponsorship of Leo Tong Chen and his family; Zhang Wei, Li Mo, Zhang Mo Tong and Zhang Mo Lin; (Chi Xian Ren) Mao Gui Rong and Chi Mei; and Joseph Tse 謝偉傑, Patricia Tse 鄒碧玲 and family, in dedication to all eczema sufferers. Their support has helped make the work on this translation possible.

Text Body

The Translation
From The Chapters on Monastic Discipline
The Chapter on Medicines
ab.

Abbreviations

AA Aṅguttara­nikāya-Aṭṭhakathā. Edited by Walleser and Kopp (1924–56).
AG Anavatapta­gāthā.
AKBh Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya. Edited by Pradhan = Pradhan 1967.
AKUp Abhidharma­kośopāyikā-ṭīkā. (Section numbers are based on Honjō 1984 and 2014.)
AN Aṅguttara­nikāya = Morris et al. 1885–1961.
AdhvG Adhikaraṇa­vastu. Edited by Gnoli (1978).
Ap Apadāna = Lilley 2000.
BAK Bodhisattvāvadāna­kalpalatā = Chandra Das and Vidyābhūshana 1940.
BHSD Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. Vol. II Dictionary = Edgerton 1953.
Bhv Bhaiṣajya­vastu.
BhvY Bhaiṣajya­vastu. Japanese translation by Yao = Yao 2013a.
CPD The Critical Pāli Dictionary = Trenckner et al. 1924–92.
Ch. Chinese translation.
ChDas Tibetan English Dictionary = Das 1902.
Crv Carma­vastu.
Cīv Cīvara­vastu.
D Degé xylograph (scanned and published by the Buddhist Digital Resource Center).
DA Dīgha­nikāya-Aṭṭhakathā = Rhys Davids et al. 1968–71.
DN Dīgha­nikāya = Rhys Davids and Carpenter 1890–1911.
DPPN Dictionary of Pāli Proper Names = Malalasekera 1937.
DhpA Dhamma­padattha­kathā = Norman 1906.
Divy Divyāvadāna = Cowell and Neil [1886] 1987.
DĀ Dīrghāgama.
DĀ 35 Ambāṣṭha­sūtra. Edited by Melzer (2010a).
DĀc Dīrghāgama. Chinese translation (Taishō no. 1 Chang ahan jing 長阿含經).
EĀc Ekottarikāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 125 Zengyi ahan jing 増壹阿含經).
GBhv The Bhaiṣajya­vastu in the Gilgit manuscript = GMNAI i, 46–134.
GM Gilgit manuscripts of the Vinaya­vastu edited by Dutt = Dutt 1942–50 (page numbers of Bhv, which is in part i, is referred to just with “GM,” and those of other vastus with “GM ii, iii, and iv,” with part numbers).
GMNAI i Gilgit Manuscripts in the National Archives of India: Facsimile Edition vol. 1, Vinaya Texts = Clarke 2014.
H Hemis manuscript.
J Jātaka = Fausbøll [1877–96] 1962–64.
Jäschke Tibetan English Dictionary = Jäschke 1881.
KA Kaṭhināvadāna = Degener 1990.
Kṣv Kṣudraka­vastu.
MN Majjhima­nikāya = Trenckner et al. [1888–1925] 1974–79.
MPS Mahā­parinirvāṇa-sūtra = Waldschmidt 1950–51.
MSA Mahā­sudarśanāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts.
MSV Mūla­sarvāstivāda Vinaya.
MW A Sanskrit-English Dictionary = Monier-Williams 1899.
MdhA Māndhātāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts.
Merv-av Avadāna anthology from Merv = Karashima and Vorobyova-Desyatovskaya 2015.
Mma Mahā­mantrānusāriṇī-sūtra = Skilling 1994–97, 608–22.
Mmvr Mahā­māyūrī­vidyā­rajñī = Takubo 1972.
Mv Mahā­vastu = Senart 1882–97.
Mvy Mahā­vyutpatti = Sakaki 1916.
MĀc Madhyamāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 26 Zhong ahan jing 中阿含經).
N Narthang xylograph.
NBhv The newly identified Bhaiṣajya­vastu fragments held in a private collection, Virginia, and the Schøyen Collection.
Negi Tibetan–Sanskrit Dictionary = Negi 1993–2005.
P Peking xylograph.
PLv Pāṇḍulohitaka­vastu.
PTSD PTS’s Pāli–English Dictionary = Rhys Davids and Stede 1921–25.
Ph phug brag manuscript.
Prjv Pravrajyāvastu. Translation in Miller 2018.
PrjvVW Pravrajyāvastu edited by Vogel and Wille. I: Vogel and Wille 1984; II: 1992; III: 1996; IV: 2002 (all these files are now available in one pdf file online, Vogel and Wille 2014).
R Ragya printed Kangyur.
S Stok Palace Manuscript.
SHT Sanskrithandschriften aus den Turfanfunden.
SN Saṃyutta­nikāya = Feer [1884–98] 1975–2006.
SWTF Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden = Waldschmidt et al. 1973–2018.
Sbhv Saṅghabheda­vastu.
SbhvG Saṅghabheda­vastu. edited by Gnoli (1977–78).
Sh Shey Palace manuscript.
Skt. Sanskrit.
Sn Sutta­nipāta = Andersen and Smith [1913] 1984.
Sumav Sumāgadhāvadāna = Iwamoto 1979.
SĀc Saṃyuktāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 99 Za ahan jing 雜阿含經).
SĀc2 Saṃyuktāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 100 Bieyi za ahan jing 別譯雜阿含經).
SĀc3 Saṃyuktāgama Chinese translation (Taishō no. 101 Za ahan jing 雜阿含經).
T Tokyo manuscript.
Taishō Taishō shinshū daizōkyō 大正新脩大藏經. 100 vols. Tokyo: Taishō Issaikyō Kankōkai 大正一切經刊行會, 1924–34.
TheraG Theragāthā = Oldenberg and Pischel 1883.
Tib. Tibetan translation.
U Urga printed Kangyur .
Ud  Udāna = Steinthal 1982.
Ug Uttara­grantha.
Uv Udāna­varga = Bernhard 1965–68, i.
UvTib Udāna­varga in Tibetan translation = Champa Thupten Zongtse 1990.
VS Vinaya­sūtra transliterated by Study Group of Sanskrit Manuscripts in Tibetan dBu med Script.
Vin Vinayapiṭaka in Pāli = Oldenberg [1879–83] 1982–1997.
Viś I The first story of Viśvantara in the Bhv.
Viś II The second story of Viśvantara in the Bhv.
Viś III The story of Viśvantara in the Sbhv.
Viś IV Viśvantarāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts.
Vvbh Vinaya­vibhaṅga.
ms Manuscript.
Śav Śayanāsana­vastu.
ŚavG Śayanāsana­vastu. Edited by Gnoli (1978).
n.

Notes

n.­1
For an overview of the entire Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, see Clarke 2015, 73–81.
n.­2
Folios 91–293: GM i; GMNAI i plates 46–134.
n.­3
For details, see Yao 2018 and literature referred to therein.
n.­4
8.­22–8.­61 in the Tibetan version; see note to the corresponding translation.
n.­5
See Hiraoka 1998.
n.­6
Taishō no. 1448, Genben shuoyiqieyoubu pinaiye yaoshi 根本説一切有部毘奈耶藥事, Taishō 24.1a1–97a24.
n.­7
See the Pedurma edition, bka’ ’gyur ii 745, 867n14–15.
n.­8
Csoma [1836] 1984.
n.­9
Cf. Panglung 1980.
n.­10
The Skt. verb anu√jñā, usually translated gnang ba/rjes su gnang ba, covers a range of meanings, such as “allow” and “order.” The present translation adopts “authorize” as the translation of the verb in the context of Vinaya rules. Cf. Yao 2015, 221n15.
n.­11
Monastics are not supposed to eat anything after noon, whereas they are allowed to drink several kinds of juice. Cf. Vvibh, ja 151.a.3–152.b.2; Taishō no. 1442, 23.824b7–c19.
n.­12
For a related account in the Muktaka of the Ug, see pa F.159.b.1–4; Taishō no. 1456, 24.440b13–18. Cf. Kishino 2016, 242.
n.­13
GBhv manthā; GM maṇḍaḥ. In the Śrautasūtra, manthā is rice or barley that has been threshed, roasted, and mixed with water or milk (Einoo 1984).
n.­14
Skt. odana. In the Śrautasūtra, odana is rice or barley that has been threshed and boiled with water or milk (Einoo 1984).
n.­15
GBhv parūṣakapānaṃ; GM pāruṣikapānaṃ.
n.­16
These eight kinds of drinks appear again in the Bhv, in 11.­38.
n.­17
Tib. pad ma ke sa ra’i me tog; Skt. padmakesara (“the filament of a lotus”).
n.­18
Cf. Kṣv, tha 11a–b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.210b.
n.­19
Skt. tapo lākṣā; Tib. rgya skyeg ni rgya skyegs so (S skyeg; D skegs).
n.­20
Skt. stapa­karṇī sikthaṃ; Tib. spra tshil ni spra tshil lo.
n.­21
Tib. dus su rung ba gang yin pa dang / thun tshod du rung ba gang yin pa dang / zhag bdun pa gang yin pa dang / ’tsho ba’i bar du bcang ba gang yin pa de gal te thun tshod du rung ba dang ’dres par gyur na thun tshod la yongs su spyad par bya: “When medicines to be consumed at the appropriate time or medicines to be consumed at night or medicines to be consumed in seven days or medicines to be consumed throughout life are mixed with medicines to be consumed at night, these should be consumed during the night.” This, however, contradicts the above rule. Skt. and Ch. do not include “medicines to be consumed at the appropriate time.” We opt for the reading in Skt. and Ch.
n.­22
GBhv śiśukā; Ch. jiang tun 江豚 (“porpoise” or “river dolphin”); Tib. sbal pa dkar po (“white frog”); GM śuśukā. We opt for the reading in GBhv and Ch.
n.­23
Skt. does not contain this sentence.
n.­24
This monk might have mistaken the kaṣāya for a type of cosmetic used for the body. For kaṣāya as a cosmetic, see Matsuyama 1980–2002, no. 35. The same situation is found in the next section, which is about collyrium.
n.­25
The passage “When the monks reported . . . . The physician said” is abbreviated in the text with the expression “as stated above.”
n.­26
Skt., Tib.: “āmra astringent, as stated above” (omitting nimba and the text after it). Ch. states the list in full, and explains how to use these astringents: “You should crush and boil the bark or leaves of these medicines and smear them on your body.”
n.­27
The passage from “and said, ‘Sir, since I have a disease” up to “The first monk said” is abbreviated in the text with the expression “as stated above.”
n.­28
This monk might have mistaken the collyrium for a type of cosmetic used as eyeliner. See n.­24.
n.­29
The phrase “he himself must know” is abbreviated in the text with the expression “as stated above.”
n.­30
Tib. btsag yug snam gyi mig sman (“red ocher collyrium”); Skt. sauvīrakāñjana; Ch. sao pi luo shi an shan na 騷毘羅石安膳那 (“antimony collyrium”).
n.­31
Cf. the Muktaka of the Ug, pa F.162.a.5–6; Taishō no. 1456, 24.441a20–23.
n.­32
Cf. the Nidāna in the Ug, pa F.81.a.6–81.b.1; Taishō no. 1456, 24.420a7–12 (Kishino 2013, 144–45).
n.­33
Cf. Kṣv, tha F.181.b–182.b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.269c.
n.­34
Skt. śrāmaṇeraka; Ch. qiu ji 求寂 (“a novice”); Tib. dge sbyong (“śramaṇa,” “an ascetic”). We opt for Skt. and Ch.
n.­35
According to the Vinayavibhaṅga, guḍa is the same thing as phāṇita (cf. D: ’dul ba cha, F.212.ab).
n.­36
Guḍakhādanika can be eaten both at the appropriate time and at inappropriate times because it is not a meal but a medicine to be consumed within seven days. Rice is to be eaten only at the appropriate time because it is a meal. In this situation, guḍakhādanika and rice flour are mixed together. Revata was afraid that if he ate the guḍakhādanika he would become guilty of an offense.
n.­37
Tib. uses the same words, bca’ ba bu ram, for both guḍakhādanika and guḍakhādanīya.
n.­38
The last words of this summary, be’i ra to// sprin can bya rog rnams yin no, cannot be identified in the following passages. GBhv is damaged here.
n.­39
The following forty-six folios of GBhv are lost.
n.­40
Skt. *calācala (“ever-moving”); Tib. g.yo ba dang mi g.yo ba (“moving and not moving”). This stock passage about one who realizes the state of an arhat, “He, exerting himself … Indra and Upendra,” appears in the Sbhv, which gives us the original Sanskrit.
n.­41
Whereas this section of the Bhv prohibits only eating the flesh of elephants and nāgas, the Muktaka of the Ug prohibits the flesh of other kinds of beings such as crows, dogs, raptors, mules, foxes, and monkeys (pa F.157.a.2–158.b.7; Taishō no. 1456, 24.439b21–24). Cf. Kishino 2016, 242.
n.­42
Though not entirely clear, what is most likely meant is that the king might suspect that the pious gods, etc., have killed his elephants to offer their flesh to Buddhist monks.
n.­43
Ch. ji guo chu ye 既過初夜; Tib. de’i mtshan mo ’das nas (“after that night had passed”). We opt for Ch.
n.­44
Although Tib. bya ka lan da ka gnas pa seems to be a translation of *Kalandakanivāsa, this name is spelled Kalandaka­nivāpa in other chapters of the Vinayavastu where Skt. is extant. For the etymology of the name, see SbhvG i 163–166.
n.­45
Although the Skt. folios are lost for this part, we find the same Tib. name and its Skt. counterpart in another part of the Bhv (kha F.190.b.7 (9.­375); GM 104.3). Ch. a di ye 阿帝耶 provides further support for the name.
n.­46
A stock passage about the Buddha’s smile. For Skt., see SbhvG ii 161–63.
n.­47
For these two verses, see Skilling 1999 and Teiser 2006, 65.
n.­48
*Bala­cakravartin. A kind of inferior wheel-turning king. Cf. BHSD s.v. bala-cakravartin.
n.­49
Ch. cong kou er ru 從口而入 (“entered from the mouth”).
n.­50
The Nidāna of the Ug gives an account related to this rule in the Bhv, and its Ch. version preserves the Hemorrhoids Sūtra, which includes mantras, whereas the Tib. version does not mention such a sūtra. The sūtra has also been translated independently both in Ch. (Taishō no. 1325) and Tib. (Arśapraśamanasūtra, Toh 621). For details of the passage in the Nidāna, see Kishino 2013, 146–47, 347–48. For editions and studies of both independent sūtras, see Yamanaka et al. 2011. For comparisons between Buddhist and non-Buddhist literature on hemorrhoids, see Yamanaka et al. 2012.
n.­51
Ch. 時王大瞋。乃遣大臣。斬惡人首。: “At that time, the king became very angry, sent a minister, and cut off the wicked man’s head.” Judging from its several examples in the vinaya literature, the phrase “I have renounced [a person]” uttered by a king means a death sentence. For the most clear example, see SbhvG ii 171; nga 226.a.
n.­52
S smod byed; D gnod byed.
n.­53
Ch. si wan er qian 四萬二千 (“forty-two thousand”).
n.­54
The Āyuḥparyanta­sūtra (Matsumura 1989, 83–84) and the Udānavarga (Uv 8.2–5) provide us with Sanskrit verses parallel to these lines, which are lost in Skt. Bhv.
n.­55
Tib. gru sum; Ch. san zhong se yao 三種澁藥; Skt. *trikaṭuka: “black and long pepper and dry ginger.” MW s.v. trikaṭuka. Cf. Pāli: tekaṭula, “black sesame, rice, and mugga bean,” Vin i 210.28.
n.­56
Tib. chab mar (lit. “water-oil”); Ch. su 酥 (translation of Skt. sarpis, “clarified butter, ghee”).
n.­57
Within the boundary, cooking and storing food is prohibited. Ānanda’s answer may sound odd because the setting of this story is “a village where the boundary had not been fixed.” However, a kind of boundary can be established even in a place where the boundary has not been fixed (Poṣv 326–27 § 49.1).
n.­58
Ch. lacks this question and the following answer.
n.­59
Ch. sheng mi 生米 (“raw rice”); Tib. ’bras skam (“dry rice”).
n.­60
This story of Pūrṇa has a parallel in the Pūrṇāvadāna, chapter 2 of the Divy (English trsl. Tatelman 2000; Rotman 2008–17, i).
n.­61
S bdag gis; D bdag gi.
n.­62
According to the Arthaśāstra, “A child begotten by a master with his own female slave shall be considered free along with the mother” (Tatelman 2000, 82n9).
n.­63
According to the Manusmṛti, the first sixteen days of the menstrual period were considered to be suitable for pregnancy, although having intercourse in the first four days is not recommended (Manu 3.46–47). For other views on the appropriate time for conception, see Kritzer 2014, 12. Cf., also, ibid. 40–41; 230–32.
n.­64
Although this passage is abbreviated here, it has not yet appeared in full in the Bhv. The full passage appears in Chapter Nine, X. F. 9. b. The Story of Prince Sudhana.
n.­65
The Sanskrit term translated “loans” here is uddhāra, and those translated “two different types of deposits” are nyāsa and nikṣepa. Cf. Kane 1973, 454–61; Sarma 1997, 192; and Olivelle 2015, q.v.
n.­66
Although there has been no explanation in the story, it would be safe to assume that Bhava’s wife and sons abandoned him only temporarily and came back to him after he recovered from the illness.
n.­67
Ch. chi tong 赤銅 (“copper”).
n.­68
Tib. ’phel; Skt. (Divy) bhidyate (“split, broken”). The meaning of the Tib. (“Mantras increase”) is unclear to the present translator, whereas there seems to be no problem in the Skt.
n.­69
This verse appears frequently in the MSV and other Buddhist and non-Buddhist literature. Cf. Uv 1.22 (cf. Mizuno 1995, 11. Note that there is some confusion in the right column of the table), Rāmāyana 2.98.16, etc.
n.­70
S da; D de.
n.­71
Translation of this sentence is tentative.
n.­72
S mi blang gi; D gis.
n.­73
These texts have been thought by scholars such as Lamotte and Mayeda to belong to the Kṣudraka­piṭaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins (Lamotte 1957; Mayeda 1964). Among these texts, the Śailagāthā is included in the Bhv itself: B. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Verse).
n.­74
S sangs rgyas kyi: D kyis.
n.­75
S dge sbyong; D dge slong. Cf. Divy: śramaṇo.
n.­76
S gang gi; D gis.
n.­77
Tib. sangs rgyas dgongs pas lus gzugs bkab par gyur; Skt. ms nepacchito buddha­manorathena (147v7); cf. SbhvG ii 141; PrjvVW III 263 nepacchitā as pl. The Divy gives naiva sthito, which Rotman emends to evaṃ sthito (Rotman 2008–17, i 88: “and so he remained by the will of the Buddha,” and 406n271), whereas Hiraoka reads nepatthito (Hiraoka 2011, 246: “He clothed himself”). The present translation is based on Tib.
n.­78
The following passage corresponds to SĀc 311, SN 35.88, and MN 145. Cf. Yao 2010.
n.­79
S lhag par zhen cing gnas na; D nas.
n.­80
Tib. lacks this part of the conversation: “Pūrṇa, the people of Śroṇāparāntaka are fierce…” up to “…but they do not strike me with sticks or swords,” while the Divy and Ch. provide it.
n.­81
P bcom ldan ’das kyi; D, S: kyis.
n.­82
This alludes to a story about monks’ suicide in the Vinayavibhaṅga (D ca F.133.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.659c).
n.­83
Ch. does not abbreviate the stock phrase here.
n.­84
Only in the Bhv and the Divy does the story of Pūrṇa in these texts continue beyond Pūrṇa’s attainment of arhatship with Pūrṇa alive. In the other parallel stories, such as SĀc 311, Taishō no. 108, MN 145, and SN 35.88, Pūrṇa achieves complete emancipation (parinirvāṇa) at this point. See Yao 2010, 3.2.1.
n.­85
S lha min; D lha mi.
n.­86
On the original Skt. of this verse, see Shackleton Bailey 1950, 179.
n.­87
S khyod kyi gcen; D khyod kyis gcan.
n.­88
S rgya mtsho chen por; D po.
n.­89
The text here lacks the phrase “why do I harass you?” See Shackleton Bailey 1950, 179; kha F.119.a.
n.­90
Skt. (Divy) candana­mālaḥ prāsādaḥ; Tib. tsan dan gyi phreng ba’i khang bzangs: “a palace garlanded with sandalwood.” Cf. BHSD s.v. māla.
n.­91
The Sumāgadhāvadāna has a similar story. See Iwamoto [1967] 1978; 1979.
n.­92
The “venerable elder Pūrṇa” referred to here is a different person from Pūrṇa who has been the subject of this story so far. There are at least two different interpretations of the word kuṇḍopadhānīyaka, one considering it to qualify the person by his birthplace as Tib. does (Burnouf 1876, 232; Iwamoto 1967, 68; and Hiraoka 2007, i 109) and the other by his practice, using a water pot (kuṇḍa) as a pillow (upadhāna) (Iwamoto 1979, 16; Tatelman 2000, 89; Rotman 2008–17, i 409). The present translation follows the former. As Rotman notes, a monk named Kuṇḍadhāna Thera is known to Pali literature. Although he is said to be “the first among those who received food tickets (salāka)” (DPPN, q.v.), there seem to be few other things in common between this person and the “venerable elder Pūrṇa” in the present story.
n.­93
Tib. ri dags; Skt. (Divy) mṛgāra; Ch. lu mu fu ren 鹿母夫人 (*mṛgāramātā).
n.­94
Tib. grags pa; Skt. (Divy) vapuṣmattayā (“by handsomeness”); Ch. yan mao 顏貌 (“face”).
n.­95
S ngo mtshar du gyur pas; D pa’i.
n.­96
Skt. (Divy) pihitāny apāyadvārāṇi; Ch. guan bi e qu 關閉惡趣. Tib. ngan song gi sgo ni bkum: “destroyed the gate to inferior states of existence.” We opt for Skt. and Ch.
n.­97
S: bcom ldan ’das kyis; D kyi.
n.­98
For the following story, cf. Merv-av 207.
n.­100
On Vakkalin, who is known for his suicide in the Āgamas and Nikāyas, see Sugimoto 1981, 21–24; Delhey 2009; and Anālayo [2011c] 2015, 235–56.
n.­101
The following stories about the visit of the two nāgas and the conversion of Mahā­maudgalyāyana’s mother are quoted in the AKUp without any mention of the source. Cf. Honjō 2014, ii 835ff.
n.­102
A similar statement appears in the Kṣv, D da F.191.a.2–4; Taishō no. 1451, 24.375c17–21.
n.­103
For previous studies on the monastic office responsible for monastic property, upadhivārika, see Shōno 2017, 54n9.
n.­104
The following story has been partially translated from Ch. in Teiser 2006, 58. For the parallel in Divy 2, see Strong 1983, 180, as well as the other translations listed in n.­60.
n.­105
The following statement by the Buddha corresponds to AN 2.4.2 (I 61–62) and EĀc 20.11. It also has parallels in the Vvbh (cf. Yao 2010, 3.2.2); Kṣv (cf. Schopen [1995] 2004a, 179); and the Nidāna in the Ug (Kishino 2013, 393n257).
n.­106
bu mo bzang mo (Skt. bhadrakanyā) may be a common noun meaning “noble girl” rather than a proper name. Among BHSD and modern translations of Divy 2 (Burnouf 1876; Sakaki 1912–15; Iwamoto 1974; Tatelman 2000; Hiraoka 2007; Rotman 2008–17, i; and Strong 1983 as a partial translation of this episode), only Rotman translates the word as a common noun.
n.­107
The following verse has a parallel in the Prjv (GM 4.59/D 4.356). Ch. of the Prjv does not provide the verse.
n.­108
This story has a parallel in the Vvbh, D ja F.221.a–F.224.a, Taishō no. 1442, 23.842c–844a). It explains the origin of a festival held for two nāga kings, which is also mentioned in the Prjv (1.144), the Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga, and the Avadāna­śataka (Schopen 2007, 218ff.).
n.­109
See the story of the conversion of Nanda and Upananda in the Vvbh (Taishō no. 1442, 23.866c–869a), which has a parallel in EĀc 36.5 (Taishō no. 125, 2.703b ff.). This story presents a similar plot to the story in the Bhv, in which two nāga kings dressed as humans do not show respect to a human king and the king becomes angry.
n.­110
The Udānavarga (Uv 21.11–13) gives us Skt. verses parallel to these lines.
n.­111
These two verses have parallels in SN 7.2.6 (I 179), SĀc 1155 (Taishō no. 99, 2.307c), SĀc2 78 (Taishō no. 100, 2.401a), and SĀc3 7 (Taishō no. 101, 2.495a).
n.­112
Ch. dang zi hui guo 當自悔過; Tib. bzod pa byin cig: “give forgiveness.” We opt for Ch. Cf. corresponding words in the Vvbh, bzod pa gsol bar bya.
n.­113
Ch. ba ri 八日, “eighth day,” without mention of the fourteenth day.
n.­114
Here, the story of the nāga king Apalāla begins. See n.­128. The series of episodes including that of a brahmin’s rebirth as Apalāla, his conversion by the Buddha, the competition between Magadha and Vaiśālī at the occasion of the Buddha’s crossing the Ganges, the quelling of an epidemic by the Buddha in Vaiśālī, etc. have parallels in Taishō no. 155 Foshuo pusa benhang jing 佛説菩薩本行經.
n.­115
Agnidatta asks the brahmin’s wife in Ch.
n.­116
In Ch., the name of the daughter is Dian guang 電光, “Lightning,” the wife’s is Zhen bao 震雹, “Hail,” and the son’s wife’s is Sheng lun nao 勝輪惱, “Overwhelming the Torment of the Circle.”
n.­117
A parallel story in Taishō no. 155, Foshuo pusa benhang jing 佛説菩薩本行經, specifies “the four great disciples”: Mahākāśyapa, Śāriputra, Maudgalyāyana, and Aniruddha.
n.­118
There are other examples in which wishes maliciously made are realized in the Prjv (Skt. missing; 4.299–4.316; Taishō no. 1444, 23.1038b) and its parallel in Divy 24 (346.4–7); Crv (GM iv 179.2–4; ka F.260.b; Taishō no. 1447, 23.1051b) and its parallel in Divy 1 (14.17–19); Kṣv (da F.150.b–151a; Taishō no. 1451, 362c–363a). The means to prevent a malicious wish from being realized is explained in Bhv (8.­92–8.­94); GM 19.4–20.2; Taishō 24a13–28.
n.­119
Tib. sdom la; Ch. nei she song yue 内攝頌曰: “said in the internal summary of contents (i.e., “section index” in the present translation).” We opt for Tib.
n.­120
Ch. bo zha zhu zhang lin 波吒竹仗林 (*Pāṭali, *Veṇuyaṣṭikā). Despite this Summary of Contents, Ch. does not include the episode of the Buddha’s stay in Nālandā and Veṇuyaṣṭikā.
n.­121
Strangely, neither this word nor the corresponding episode appears in the following story.
n.­122
This event is explained in detail in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 186ff.; nga F.238.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.197b28ff.). The Bhv presents the story of the birth of this elephant in a later part (10.­54).
n.­123
According to the first chapter of the Prjv, Aṅga was conquered by Bimbisāra when he was a prince. After he went back to Magadha to accede to the throne, his retainer ruled Aṅga.
n.­124
The story of how Ajātaśatru, having heard the Buddha’s sermon, came to have his “rootless faith” is told in the Śrāmāṇyaphalasūtra in the Sbhv. For modern discussions about the meaning of “rootless faith” and the different interpretations of the phrase provided by the Abhidharma-mahā­vibhāṣā, See Wu 2016.
n.­125
Ch. lacks the following stock passage.
n.­126
In this section, the story of how the Buddha was asked to end the epidemic that had swept through Vaiśālī is recounted. The subject of the epidemic fades away and then suddenly reappears at the end of the section about Vaiśālī, ending with the quelling of the epidemic.
n.­127
A stock passage about invitations is abbreviated in Tib. The present translation is based on Ch., which gives the passage in full.
n.­128
It is worth noting that the destination of the long journey made by the Buddha in the Bhv is specified here. Erich Frauwallner argues that it is clear that the episode in the Bhv where the Buddha flew from Rohitaka to the north (X. Rohitaka) is a later interpolation into the story of his travels in Mathurā (Frauwallner 1956, 31–33). However, when we look at the larger context of the Bhv, we find the purpose of his going to the north clearly shown here, long before the Rohitaka episode. If the Buddha’s flight to the north is to be considered a later interpolation, as Frauwallner says, then the episode here, in which King Ajātaśatru requests the Buddha to go to the north, would also have to be considered an interpolation. In addition, the story of the origin of the harm caused by the nāga king Apalāla, and even the story of the nāga kings Valguka and Giri (A. The Story of the Two Nāga Kings and King Bimbisāra), might be suspected of having been similarly added to the “original text.” Therefore, Frauwallner’s argument should have covered a far larger portion of the Bhv to be persuasive, but he does not mention this point. For the story of Apalāla, cf. Ch’en 1947, 279n134; Tucci 1958 with caution; Vogel 1972, 121–23; Zin 2006a, 54–68.
n.­129
Ch. here gives the Buddha’s words as “Let us go to Pāṭali Village” and starts the story of the Buddha’s visit to Pāṭali Village, but the last portion of this section and the episodes about Nālandā and Veṇuyaṣṭikā are missing.
n.­130
These “five advantages” are related to the “five disadvantages” later explained by the Buddha to Ānanda after returning from the north.
n.­131
This section corresponds to SĀc 987 and SĀc2 212.
n.­132
The passage “One should not despise … great power” has a parallel in SĀc 1226, and there is a story corresponding to SĀc 1226 in SbhvG i 182. In these parallels, the passage in question is attributed to the Buddha himself.
n.­133
The following five verses have parallels in Sn 253–57 and J 363 (iii 196), and the fifth one in Uv 28.5, etc. (cf. Yajima 1997, 36–37).
n.­134
Here ends the correspondence to the SĀc and SĀc2 and starts the partial correspondence to the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra (MPS, Waldschmidt 1950–51, 134–202, the first part being supplied by the author because it is missing in the manuscript).
n.­135
This section corresponds to SĀc 403.
n.­136
S sdug bsngal ’gog pa dang; D om.
n.­137
From this scene on, Tib. and Ch. correspond. The following sections up to D. A Story of a Former Life of the Buddha: King Mahāsudarśana are divided by the present translator for convenience.
n.­138
The sermon below corresponds to AN 5.213.
n.­139
A stock passage about a brahmin’s visit to the Buddha. For Skt, see GM 64–65.
n.­140
Ch. 大威力天神以繩量界、欲造大城: “Celestial gods of great power were measuring the land with a rope with the intention of building a great city.”
n.­141
Ch. 亦無隣國之難及水火所損: “And it will neither be in any danger of being attacked by a neighboring country nor be damaged by water or fire.”
n.­142
Gregory Schopen has pointed out that the following verses are found also in the Ug of the MSV, and he suggests that the Ug might provide the original context of these verses (Schopen [2004b, 176] 2014, 344).
n.­143
S rnam par ltung ba’i lus; D rnam par lhung ba’i lus.
n.­144
This story has a parallel in EĀc 38.11. Cf. Kuan 2013, 611. The Bhv presents in a later part (2. Mahāsudarśana) another story of King Mahāsudarśana, the content of which is totally different from that in this section.
n.­145
The story extending from this section (“The Ganges”) to the next section (“Mahāpraṇāda”) has a parallel in the Maitreyāvadāna, chapter 3 of the Divy (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 119–33).
n.­146
Cf. Uv 17.7–9.
n.­147
The meaning of this verse is quite unclear to the present translator, despite various interpretations of parallel verses (Divy 56.8–11, Uv 17.7–9, and Ud 8.6) by modern scholars.
n.­148
This verse appears twice in the Bhv with some difference in Tibetan translation, most significantly in the fourth line: su zhig spyod pa tshol bar byed (kha F.29.a); gang zhig yongs su btsal bar spyod (kha F.133.b). The second occurrence seems to be closer to the Sanskrit parallels: kasya paryeṣaṇāṃ cared iti (GBhv 147v6; Divy 56). The first occurrence might be based on a variant reading such as *kasya paryeṣaṇaṃ care (cf. a Pali parallel in Ud 7.9: kissa pariyesanaṃ care ti, though the most likely rendering of this Pali phrase would be rather similar to our second occurrence). The present English translation attempts to reproduce the respective meaning of the two occurrences in Tibetan. For comparisons of the other parts of this verse in the Sanskrit and Pali parallels, see Enomoto 1984b, 18–19.
n.­149
Cf. J 264 (ii 333) and J 489 (iv 325).
n.­150
BhvY 3.6.1 (p. 102).
n.­151
BhvY 3.6.2 (p. 102ff.).
n.­152
BhvY 3.6.3 (p. 105ff.). For variations of the story of King Śaṅkha (and the Buddha Maitreya), see Anālayo [2014b] 2017, 349–91.
n.­153
These names, Piṅgala, Pāṇḍuka, Elāpatra, and Śaṅkha, are interpreted as the names of the “four great kings” by Hiraoka and Rotman. The present translation rather follows the Tib. and Ch. versions, which seem to consider these names as the names of “four great treasures” and the “four great kings” as the famous gods referred to as such. Note, also, Edgerton interprets the names as both the names of four great treasures and those of four nāga kings guarding them (s.v. “elapatra”). In any case, it is not clear what kind of “treasures” are meant here.
n.­154
For the Buddha Maitreya’s visit to the bones of Mahākāśyapa, see AKUp 7030 (Honjō 2014, ii 841–42). Cf., also, Merv-av 261ff.
n.­155
Tib. ’khor dge slong ’bum phrag dgu bcu rtsa drug dang; Ch. 與八萬倶胝苾芻 (“with eight hundred billion monks”); Divy aśīti­bhikṣu­koṭi­vāro (“surrounded by eighty million monks”).
n.­156
BhvY 3.6.4 (p. 107ff.).
n.­157
In Ch., the following dialogue is not between the Buddha Śākyamuni and his disciples but between the Buddha Maitreya and his disciples.
n.­158
In Divy 3, Ratnaśikhin is not the son of King Vāsava’s chief priest but the son of the king himself.
n.­159
BhvY 3.a (p. 110ff.). Hereafter the story corresponds to the MPS (p. 160ff.).
n.­160
BhvY 3.b (p. 111ff.). This section corresponds to SĀc 854, SN 55.10, and AKUp 9035. Cf. Honjō 2014, ii 921–23; Yao 2010, 3.2.7.
n.­161
The present translation generally follows E. Waldschmidt in MPS §9 for the restoration of proper names in this section.
n.­162
MPS ardha­tṛtīyāni upāsaka­śatāni (“two hundred and fifty lay brothers”). Ch. tallies with Tib.
n.­163
MPS pañcopāsaka­śatāni (“five hundred lay brothers”). Ch. tallies with Tib.
n.­164
The following teaching on dependent origination is available in Sanskrit in SbhvG ii 209.22ff.
n.­165
BhvY 3.c (p. 114ff.). This section corresponds to AKUp 2051. See Honjō 2014, i 225–28.
n.­166
This section in Ch. and the AKUp begins: “The Blessed One, traveling through the country of Vṛji, had arrived in Nādikā. Then Āmrapālī heard that . . . .”
n.­167
A verse similar to this appeared before in the Bhv (3.­34).
n.­168
A stock passage about a visit by a god to the Buddha. For Skt., see GM 1.58 (8.­282 ff.).
n.­169
This and the following sections (A to E) have been divided by the present translator for convenience. This section (VII.A) and the third section (C. The Sermon to Āmrapālī) correspond to SĀc 622. See Yao 2010, 3.2.8. For parallels to this sūtra and a Sanskrit text of this part of the MPS revised with later identified manuscript fragments, see Hosoda 2014, 115–21.
n.­170
Hereafter the order of episodes in Tib. is different from that in Ch. In Ch., the episodes are arranged in the following order: the Buddha’s arrival at Vaiśālī (first part of VII.A); E. The End of the Epidemic in Vaiśālī; the visit of Āmrapālī to the Buddha (rest of VII.A); B. The Visit of the Licchavis; C. The Sermon to Āmrapālī; and D. The Former Lives of the Licchavis. See Yao 2010, 3.2.10. The fragment of a newly found Sanskrit manuscript of the Bhv (hereafter NBhv) tallies with Ch. in the order of the episodes.
n.­171
gnyid kyis snyom pas dub pa. We adopt the translation of the parallel passage in the Kṣv: gnyid dang ngal ba dang ngal so ba.
n.­172
This section has a parallel in AN 5.195. SĀc 1149 is also close to this story. See Yao 2010, 3.2.9.
n.­173
According to Chapter One of the Prjv, King Bimbisāra of Magadha conquered Aṅga and became the king of that country before he ascended the throne of Magadha. Therefore, in this verse, “the king of Aṅga” and “the lord of Magadha” both seem to refer to King Bimbisāra (Nishimoto 1933–35, v. 23, 96n4).
n.­174
The following passage of the Buddha’s sermon to Paiṅgika is not included in the MPS.
n.­175
The following teaching is available in Sanskrit in SbhvG ii 230.11–17.
n.­176
Ch. abbreviates the stock passage “set up a jeweled pitcher … knowing the Blessed One had finished his meal and washed his hands and his bowl.” NBhv supports Ch.
n.­177
The stock phrase is abbreviated in Ch.: 當知彼廣嚴城栗姑毘, 以積習資糧故‍—‍—廣説乃至‍—‍—説伽他曰, “You should know that, because the people of the Licchavi clan in Vaiśālī have accumulated provisions … (the passage should be recited in detail) … A verse is spoken.” NBhv tallies with Ch. regarding this abbreviation.
n.­178
This section has parallels in the Vaiśālī­praveśa­mahā­sūtra, which survives in Tibetan translation, and the Mahā­mantrānusāriṇī­sūtra, which survives in Sanskrit. See Yao 2010, 3.2.10 and n.­126. See Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, trans., The Mahāsūtra “On Entering the City of Vaiśālī”, Toh 312.
n.­179
The extant Tibetan texts include a considerable number of variants especially in the mantras. Hereafter the present translation is based on the Mma and Tib. of the Bhv edited by Peter Skilling. See Skilling 1994–97, i 608–22, 564–607.
n.­180
Hereafter Ch. phonetically transliterates the sentences “The Buddha, who has compassion for the world, has spoken … the wish of all bhūtas” and “The Buddha, who has compassion for the world, has spoken” before “Muñcata muñcata,” whereas Tib. does not transliterate but translates these sentences.
n.­181
The punctuation of the mantras follows the edition of the extract from the Bhv by Peter Skilling (1994–97, i 567–603).
n.­182
The verses below also appear in a section of the Vvbh that corresponds to the Upasenasūtra. See Skilling 1994–97, ii 596.
n.­183
Ch. and Mma lack these two verses (“Because the Buddha . . . . Should leave this city”). NBhv tallies with the line “Those who have hateful thoughts … stay.”
n.­184
Ch. does not repeat the mantras and verses as Tib. does, but only states 咸依上法 (“everything accords with the above method”). Ch. then moves to the story of Āmrapālī’s visit (A. The Visit of Āmrapālī). Here NBhv tallies with Ch. concerning this lack of repetition.
n.­185
Ch. lacks this summary of contents. It is unknown whether NBhv included it, due to the damage to the corresponding folio.
n.­186
Here Ch. abbreviates the section with the statement: “As explained in detail in the teachings of the Jijian jing 飢儉經, the Sūtra of Famine, and also as in the Daopin chuanlai jing 道品傳來經, the Sūtra of the Tradition of the *Mārgavarga, Liuji jing 六集經, the Sūtra of the group of six, and Daniepan jing 大涅槃經, the *Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra.” On the other hand, the contents of this section in Tib. (Chapter 4. I) correspond to SN 47.9 and, presumably, a missing sūtra in the SĀc, the contents of which are included in the MPS (see Yao 2010, 3.2.11). NBhv provides a sentence that, in spite of the manuscript’s damaged state, seems to be similar to the original Skt. that Yijing translated. The manuscript reads: “…as in the Sūtra of Famine in the *Mārga­varga­nipāta, in the Ṣaṭsūtrika­nipāta…” This proves that “The Sūtra of the Tradition of the *Mārgavarga” in Ch. is, properly speaking, the title of a chapter of the Saṃyuktāgama that includes the Sūtra of Famine. In addition, “The Sūtra of the Group of Six” is the title of a chapter of the Dīrghāgama that includes the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra. To sum up, NBhv and Ch. both state that they abbreviate this section, which corresponds to the Sūtra of Famine in the *Mārga­varga­nipāta in the Saṃyuktāgama and also to the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra in the Ṣaṭsūtrikanipāta in the Dīrghāgama. See Yao 2013b.
n.­187
“Be completely emancipated” here means the Buddha’s final or complete nirvāṇa upon passing away.
n.­188
The “four applications of mindfulness … the eightfold path of the noble ones” are the thirty-seven aspects of awakening.
n.­189
What the phrase “two things” here indicates is not clear from the text of the Bhv itself. Kalyāṇamitra’s commentary to the Kṣv gives an explanation of the phrase appearing in a parallel passage in the Kṣv. According to this commentary, the “two things” for the Buddha are his life and the requisites such as food, drink, and oil massages, and the “two things” for a chariot are its body and everyday maintenance (D 4115 Āgama­kṣudra­kavyākhyāna, dzu F.197.b–198.a).
n.­190
For the Skt. text of the following teaching, see Fukita 2001.
n.­191
Here ends the correspondence with the MPS.
n.­192
The following stock passage about the Buddha’s smile is given in full in both Tib. and Ch., but is abbreviated in NBhv.
n.­193
*Bala­cakravartin. A kind of inferior wheel-turning king. Cf. BHSD s.v. bala-cakravartin.
n.­194
The following passage corresponds to MĀc 67, MN 83, EĀc 50.4, and the introductory section of the EĀc, AKUp 2050, etc. The story of King Mahādeva and Nimi appears again in the Bhv (6. Mahādeva and 7. King Nimi). While the story here follows exactly the Mahādevasūtra in the Madhyamāgama of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins, the second story mentioned above has been slightly changed from the Madhyamāgama version in accord with the context of the Bhv (Yao 2007; Forthcoming b). For a study of parallels to this story based on the EĀc version, see Anālayo 2011a, i 466–74; 2016b, 113–214.
n.­195
Here Ch. abbreviates the section with the statement: 廣如莫訶提婆 。 及國王相應品中説 。 “As explained in detail in the Mahā­deva­[sūtra] in the section of kings (in the Madhyamāgama).” NBhv corresponds to Ch.
n.­196
…grong dang / grong rdal dang / yul ’khor dang / rgyal po’i pho brang gi bar bya gag gi ’phur stabs kyis chod pa byung bar gyur to. Cf. Divy 22, 316.11–12: kukkuṭa­saṃpāta­mātraś ca grāmanigamarāṣṭra­rājadhānyo babhūvuḥ.
n.­197
Mahādeva is not described as a wheel-turning king in Pāli parallels.
n.­198
In the second Mahādeva story in the Bhv, the term lha’i pho nya (*devadūta, “divine messenger”) appears as gshin rje’ i pho nya (“messenger of Yama”). In other Āgama/Nikāya sources with the motif of abdication by a wheel-turning king, such as DN 26, MĀc 70, and the sixth sūtra of the Chinese Dīrghāgama, the omen of death is not described as a white hair but as the sinking of the precious chakra.
n.­199
Some parallels such as those in the MN and EĀc state that the king practiced the four pure abodes (four immeasurable states of mind), that is, love, compassion, joy, and equanimity.
n.­200
The lineage of eighty-four thousand Mahādevas and Nimi is mentioned also in the Sbhv (SbhvG i 19.27–20.1).
n.­201
There are a variety of stories in Buddhist narrative literature about virtuous people who were invited to heaven in the chariot driven by Mātali. Cf. J 243, 494.
n.­202
In the parallel in EĀc 50.4, Nimi does not blink his eyes either.
n.­203
Though the Buddha identifies himself only as Mahādeva in this story here, the story of Mahādeva and the story of Nimi in the second story in the Bhv (6. Mahādeva and 7. King Nimi) are narrated separately and the Buddha identifies himself as the protagonist in each story. The aforementioned parallel stories also provide a variety of identifications of the protagonists.
n.­204
The eightfold path of the noble ones is not mentioned in the second Mahādeva story in the Bhv.
n.­205
Ch. lacks this section. NBhv corresponds to Tib.
n.­206
Since the Buddha is said to be in Videha in the preceding story, it is rather strange that in this story the Buddha says, “Let us go to Videha.”
n.­207
For this abbreviation, see II. Middle Village.
n.­208
Ch. lacks this section. The following story corresponds to SĀc 1095, etc. (cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.13). A story related to this encounter between the Buddha and Māra in Sālā appears in the Bhv (c. A Young Brahmin).
n.­209
The following two verses correspond to Uv 30.49–50.
n.­210
Panglung mentions Taishō no. 2121 as a parallel to this story. But the parallel story in Taishō no. 2121, Jinglü yixiang 經律異相 (more precisely, sūtra no. 45.14, Taishō 53.237c19ff.) is an extract from Taishō no. 212, Chuyao jing 出曜經 (Taishō 4.626c29ff.).
n.­211
In Ch. and Taishō no. 212, it is the woman who speaks this verse. The verse corresponds to Uv 2.1, and also to the Mv and J, both of which give contexts very different from that here.
n.­212
Tib. uses the first person pronoun nga mainly for speech by the Buddha, kings, and householders (especially toward their inferiors), while it employs another pronoun, bdag, for speech by others. In this verse, Tib. has nga, probably because this verse was regarded as the words of a former buddha.
n.­213
The following four sections, from VII. Bhārgava to X. Kanthaka, are related to a series of episodes in the life story of the Buddha in the Sbhv. For the ṛṣi Bhārgava, see SbhvG i 93; nga F.15.b.
n.­214
Cf. SbhvG i.92–93; nga F.14.b–15.a.
n.­215
Cf. SbhvG i. 91; nga F.13.b.
n.­216
Cf. SbhvG i 91; nga F.14.a.
n.­217
The Sbhv does not mention this shrine.
n.­218
The Sbhv does not mention this place name.
n.­219
The following story corresponds to a part of the MPS (Waldschmidt 1948) and a part of EĀc 42.3 (cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.14). The story is depicted in reliefs from Gandhāra, where it is clearly connected to the Buddha’s nirvāṇa (Zin 2006b).
n.­220
Ch. “with the hand.” NBhv tallies with Tib. There are variations among the parallel stories regarding which part of the body, the hand or the toe, the Buddha uses here. Cf. Zin 2006b, esp. 342–43.
n.­221
Tib. rdzu ’phrul gyi stobs, Ch. 神力, both meaning “magical power.” However, these terms are problematic here. A few lines below, the Mallas ask the Buddha with what power he smashed the rock into pieces, and the Buddha’s answer is “magical power” in Tib. and Skt. (NBhv), and “the power of meditation” in Ch. The Mallas later ask if there is any other power besides the power generated from one’s father and mother, the power of meditation, and the power of dedication. The Buddha then lists seven kinds of powers: the power generated from one’s father and mother; the power of meditation, of dedication, of merit, and of knowledge; magical power, and the power of impermanence, in this order. The position of magical power, the sixth, cannot be mistaken, because an episode from the Buddha’s life story is mentioned regarding the Buddha’s defeat of non-Buddhist ascetics with his magical power. Thus, there seems to be some confusion in Tib., Skt., and Ch. here, and “the power of meditation” rather than “magical power” is likely to be appropriate in context. The present translation reflects that understanding.
n.­222
Ch. 禅定力 (“power of meditation”). Tib. rdzu ’phrul gyi stobs, Skt. (NBhv) ṛddhibala (“magical power”). We opt for Ch. See previous note.
n.­223
Or the twofold powers of Nārāyaṇa, namely, half and full.
n.­224
This refers to how the Buddha passed away. The Buddha’s passing between two sāla trees is narrated in a part of the Kṣv, where the text has a parallel of the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra: da 262.b.7–290.a.5; Taishō no.1451, 24.392b10–399b14.
n.­225
Tib. omits the powers of meditation and dedication in this verse. Ch. 禪定與解脱・福徳・智慧力, “powers of meditation, liberation [dedication? Cf. Mvy 1929], merit, and knowledge,” omits the magical and physical powers.
n.­226
Ch. translates the second verse in prose. In Tib., the first verse is translated in a verse that has nine syllables in each pāda and a second that has thirteen syllables.
n.­227
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­228
D bya can; S byed can. This entry indicates a place name bye ma can (*Sikatin), which later appears in the corresponding section ( X. Sikatin).
n.­229
In this short section, a sūtra abbreviated in Tib. is fully narrated in Ch., which is a rather rare occurrence. The sūtra in question, the title of which is not mentioned in Ch., corresponds to SĀc 263, SN 22.101 (mistakenly referred to as SN 47.19 in BhvY 149), etc. Cf. Salomon 2018, 121ff., 149ff.; Yao 2011, 3.2.15. Both SĀc 263 and SN 22.101 include a parable of a carpenter using an axe, which explains the two different ways of referring to this section in the General Summary of the Contents of the Chapter on Medicines and the Summary of Contents of Chapter Five: “The Carpenter” and “The Axe.”
n.­230
This sentence is an editorial insertion in the text.
n.­231
This passage is related to a part of the Buddha’s life story in the Sbhv (SbhvG i 32–33; ga F.273.a–b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.105a–b).
n.­232
According to the Sbhv, King Siṃhahanu has a son, Śuddhodana, and three other sons, as well as a daughter, Śuddhā, and three other daughters. Suprabuddha is Śuddhā’s son, which means that Suprabuddha is the Buddha’s cousin, since Śuddhodana is the Buddha’s father (SbhvG i 31–32; ga F.272.b–273.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.105a). However, shortly after this account, the Sbhv tells us that King Suprabuddha in Devadṛśa, wishing to be related to King Siṃhahanu by marriage, marries his daughters Māyā and Mahāmāyā to Prince Śuddhodana (SbhvG i 33–35; ga F.274.a–275.a; Taishō 24.105b–106a). This second account naturally suggests that King Suprabuddha is the Buddha’s maternal grandfather. Though it may not be utterly impossible for one’s grandfather to also be one’s cousin (i.e., his mother married her granduncle), these two accounts may refer to two people of the same name, or they may represent two different narrative traditions that were carelessly combined. Furthermore, the Pāli tradition gives a completely different story, which explains that Suppabuddha was Māyā’s brother, married Sīhahanu’s daughter, and had the children Bhaddakaccānā (the Buddha’s wife and mother of Rāhula) and Devadatta (DPPN s.v. 1. Suppabuddha). In this case, Suppabuddha is the Buddha’s uncle and father-in-law.
n.­233
Cf. SbhvG i 45; ga F.280.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.108a.
n.­234
For the related passage in the Sbhv, see n.­232.
n.­235
The following teaching is somewhat similar to SĀc 611.
n.­236
As well as the case discussed in n.­229, here too a sūtra abbreviated in Tib. is fully narrated in Ch. The sūtra in question, the title of which is not mentioned in Ch., corresponds to SĀc 619, SN 47.19, etc. Cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.16; Anālayo [2012b] 2015, 311–32; Hosoda 2014, 104–7.
n.­237
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­238
This section corresponds to SĀc 807, SN 54.11, etc. Cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.17, Yao forthcoming a, and Anālayo [2007] 2015, 333–45.
n.­239
Ch. “two months.”
n.­240
Although the passage is abbreviated here with the expression “as stated above” in Tib., there is no such passage before this in the Bhv. In Ch., in contrast, the passage in question is not abbreviated but narrated in full. There is an interesting correspondence between Tib., Bhv, and SĀc; in SĀc 807, this passage is abbreviated, too, and we see the passage narrated in full in SĀc 803. It is thus clear that the redactors of the MSV at some stage inserted a sūtra from the Saṃyuktāgama available to them here in the Bhv, with the abbreviation in the sūtra as it was. The text of Ch. suggests a more careful editorial operation, that is, the supplementation of the abbreviation. The difference between these two versions may be explained in two ways: the insertion of the sūtra with the abbreviation as seen in Tib. came first, and some later redactor found the passage intelligible and filled in the abbreviation; alternatively, there was only a brief reference to the Saṃyuktāgama in this part of the Bhv at an early stage, and later, when the textual transmission had branched off, redactors belonging to each tradition incorporated the sūtra from the Saṃyuktāgama at their own discretion, one doing it carelessly (as seen in Tib.) and another attentively (as seen in Ch.). For further discussion of this, see Yao forthcoming a.
n.­241
Here ends the correspondence with SĀc 807. Ch. has 乃至道品集經中説, “As stated in a sūtra of the group of sections of the path (i.e., a sūtra in the Mārgavarganipāta section of the Saṃyuktāgama).” Since SĀc 807 itself also ends here, this “abbreviation” in Ch. does not make any sense. This statement may be a reference that was wrongly placed and not removed as in Tib., which apparently existed until some stage of compilation before Ch. (see n.­240).
n.­242
This section corresponds to the Ambāṣṭhasūtra, the thirty-fifth sūtra of the Dīrghāgama manuscript identified at the end of the twentieth century (DĀ 35), manuscript fragments of a sūtra found in Central Asia, a part of the Kṣv, DĀc 20, and DN 3. For a detailed study of DĀ 35, including a comparison with the Bhv and Kṣv, see Melzer 2010a, 93–281. The present translation generally follows Melzer in DĀ 35 regarding the restoration of proper names in this section.
n.­243
Since this sentence “The Blessed One … stayed in the Icchānaṅgalā Forest near Icchānaṅgalā” has a parallel in DĀ 35, it is safe to say that the sentence existed also in the Dīrghāgama on which the Bhv was based. However, this sentence looks strange here in the Bhv, because, according to the preceding section, the Buddha has already arrived at Icchānaṅgalā (for a similar duplication of place, see 4.­70). This problem can be explained as the result of carelessness on the part of the redactors of the MSV, who, inserting the two sūtras both set in Icchānaṅgalā here in the Bhv, failed to remove the introductory sentence of the second one. Ch. provides a translation, zengzhang 増長, which does not seem to translate Icchānaṅgalā, here in the second occurrence, whereas it presents a phonetic transliteration of Icchānaṅgalā, yichenangaluo 一車難伽羅, in the preceding section.
n.­244
Tib. gsang tshig; Ch. 如我經説 (“as is said in our scripture”). The parallel in the DĀ 35 manuscript is damaged: (vāci)tāni cāsy(a maṃt)r(e)ṣu. Cf. amhākaṃ mantesu in DN 3 Ambaṭṭhasutta, i: 87; śāstre in SbhvG i: 40, in the prediction of the future of the newly born Prince Siddhārtha, who possesses the thirty-two marks of a great man. It is unclear to the present translator specifically which brahmanical scripture was assumed by the redactors of the Vinaya and the parallel sūtras.
n.­245
S bzlog par sems so; D bzlogs–.
n.­246
D and S nang. Cf. Kṣv rngam.
n.­247
DĀ 35 and the Kṣv here add “and teach him a lesson.”
n.­248
For the meaning of the word ibhya (Tib. da byung, “upstarts,” Jäschke 247a), see Caillat 1974.
n.­249
S ’dug na; D nas.
n.­250
In the first part of the Sbhv, the story of the origin of human beings is narrated, continuing through the emergence of kingship and the royal lineage from the first king Mahāsammata to the four sons of King Ikṣuvāku, who were the progenitors of the Śākyans. The lineage of the Śākyan kings follows, ending with the Buddha. The Bhv (and DĀ 35) here narrates a much shorter version of a part of this story in the Sbhv (SbhvG i 26–30).
n.­251
Ch. 弶伽河岸 (the banks of the Ganges River). Bhāgīrathī is a name of the Ganges or one of its branches (MW s.v. Bhāgīrathī).
n.­252
The passage “Each of them built his hut . . . . Later, King Ikṣuvāku remembered these four sons . . . . The ministers answered, ‘Your Majesty’s four sons … are now … on the banks of the Bhāgīrathī River” is abbreviated in Tib. with the expression “as stated above.” The present translation is based on Ch., which abbreviates only a passage in the ministers’ words: “Each of them built his hut near the ṛṣi Kapila’s hermitage and married his half sister by a different mother.” In DĀ 35 and the Kṣv, even the ministers’ words are not abbreviated. Thus, it is likely that in Tib. the similar passages before and in the ministers’ words were confused and abbreviated together.
n.­253
In the Pāli Suttapiṭaka, Vajrapāṇi (Vajirapāṇi yakkha in Pāli) appears in MN 35 as well as DN 3 in the same way, threatening to smash the head of a man who would not answer a question asked by the Buddha. In a later part of the Bhv, Vajrapāṇi plays the role of the Buddha’s attendant during the Buddha’s journey from Rohitaka to the north (X. Rohitaka). For a study of Vajrapāṇi, see Lamotte 1966.
n.­254
Bhv Ch., Kṣv Ch., and DĀ 35 give “said (to the Buddha).”
n.­255
Kṣv Ch. abbreviates the following part until just before the Buddha shows his thirty-two marks to Ambāṣṭha (Taishō 24.379b). See n.­301.
n.­256
Ch. “…because he is a sister’s son for brahmins, and because he is a child belonging to a family of kṣatriyas.”
n.­257
Ch. “…because he is a brother’s son for brahmins and a sister’s son for kṣatriyas.”
n.­258
In contrast, the possibility of anointment in the first and second cases is denied in DN 3.
n.­259
The following verse appears frequently in the Āgamas and Nikāyas: DN 27 (iii 98.1–2) and its parallels DĀc 5 (Taishō no. 1, 1.39a), MĀc 154 (Taishō no. 26, 1.676c–677a), and Taishō no. 10 (1.221c); MN 53 (i 358.28–29); SN 6.2.1 (i 153.18–19) and its parallels SĀc 1190 (Taishō no. 99, 2.322c) and SĀc2 103 (Taishō no. 100, 2.410c); SN 21.11 (ii 284.26–27); and AN 11.11 (v 327.29–30).
n.­260
Ch. “There has never been, nor is there now, nor will there be anyone as arrogant as me appearing before the Blessed One in the past, present, or future.”
n.­261
Here DĀ 35 (Melzer 2010a, 190 = DĀ 35.85) abbreviates the whole explanation of “knowledge and conduct,” which is given in full in the Lohityasūtra, the third sūtra of the Śīlaskandha section of the Dīrghāgama, and repeated as a stock passage in each sūtra in that section, which has been studied by Jinkyoung Choi (Choi 2015). In the Bhv, the explanation of knowledge and conduct is given in full in Tib. and abbreviated in Ch., as mentioned in n.­263. A Skt. parallel to this stock passage is available in the Śrāmāṇyaphala­sūtra, which also belongs to the Śīlaskandha section, preserved in the SbhvG ii 230.11–251.13. See Bonbunbutten-kenkyūkai 1994, 1995. It is worth noting that in this passage about knowledge and conduct the Buddha always addresses his listener as “Ambāṣṭha”; in the other parts of this story about Ambāṣṭha, he calls the same person “young brahmin,” without exception. This change of address, which may reflect the possible supplementation of an abridged version of the sūtra at some stage in the textual transmission, also occurs in the same story in the Kṣv.
n.­262
Tib. nyam nga ba; Skt. (Sbhv) saṃbādha. BHSD, s.v. abhyavakāśa.
n.­263
Here Ch. abbreviates the rest of the entire story of Ambāṣṭha with the statement 廣如長阿笈摩戒蘊品中説於菴婆娑婆羅門事, “As explained in detail in the story of the Brahmin Ambāṣṭha in the section of the aggregate of moral conduct (Śīlaskandha) in the Dīrghāgama.”
n.­264
Tib. ’od dang bud med can dang lhan cig tu nyal ba (lit., “lying down with light and where there is a woman”). The Sbhv parallel gives āloka­sahāgāra­śayyāṃ (ms 509r7 āloka­sahagāra­śayyāṃ; SbhvG ii 233). The present translation is supported by the usage of the word āloka­śayyāṃ in the Bhv (GM i 90; kha 168.b) and several examples of sahāgāra­śayyā, e.g., Prātimokṣa­sūtra: Banerjee 1977, 38.1–2, 41.13–14; ca 14.a.3 and 15.b.2; Abhidharma­kośa­vyākhyā by Yaśomitra: Wogihara 1932–1936, 381.29.
n.­265
There is apparently some confusion in Tib.: de chung ma dang bu pho dang bu mo len pa spangs nas/ chung ma dang / bu pho dang / skyes pa dang / khye’u dang / bu mo len pa las slar log pa yin no, “Having abandoned accepting a wife, son, and daughter, he abstains from accepting a wife, son, man, boy, and daughter.” Cf. Sbhv: sa strī­puruṣa­dāraka­dārikā­pratigrahaṃ prahāya strī­puruṣa­dāraka­dārikā­pratigrahāt prativirato bhavati (ii 509a). The present translation is based on the Sbhv.
n.­266
Tib. ’bru ma nyams pa (lit., “undamaged grain”); Skt. (Sbhv) āmadhānya.
n.­267
There is no word for “injuring” in either Tib. or Skt. (Sbhv). Note that Buddhaghosa’s commentary on the Pāli parallel (DA i 81.25–26) relates this sentence to the prohibition of pātayantikā offence 11: injuring or making others injure seeds and plants (Vin iv 34; cf. Vvbh, cha F.281.b.2–3; Taishō no. 1442, 23.776b5–6). According to Buddhaghosa’s interpretation, the Pāli word samārambha in the DN should be interpreted as “injuring, killing” (PTSD, q.v.). However, this interpretation does not apply to its counterpart here, samārambha/rtsom pa, because this word is used also in each of the following paragraphs about keeping foods, using good beds, etc. Therefore the word has to be interpreted in its supposedly more common meaning of “undertaking, doing, effort” (MW, PTSD, Jäschke, q.v.), and the whole sentence may be translated as follows: “Ambāṣṭha, some śramaṇas … live devoted to efforts aimed at various seeds and plants.” The present translation addresses the lack of meaning with the word “injuring” here. Perhaps the meaning “injuring” of the word samārambha was lost at some stage in the textual transmission, and the word was reinterpreted as “effort” and then combined with the following words: -anuyogaṃ anuyuktā viharanti.
n.­268
Tib. rtsa ba’i sa bon (lit., “seed of root”). The present translation is based on the Skt. parallel in the Sbhv, mūlabīja<ṃ>, interpreting it as a bahuvrīhi compound, “one that has its root as its seed,” i.e., one that grows from its root. The kinds of plants listed here are explained in the Vvbh (cha F.281.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.776b, Bonbunbutten-kenkyūkai 1995, 43n2).
n.­269
Tib. thor to (Vvbh tho gu); Skt. (Sbhv) agra, both meaning “a top point”; Ch. (Vvbh) jie 節 (“a joint”). The present translation combines these two meanings, based on the Vvbh, where this type of plant is represented by “sugarcane, bamboo, etc.” (cha F.281.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.776b).
n.­270
Tib. bkas pa (lit., “split”; Vvbh ’gas pa); Skt. sphuṭa (Sbhv); Ch. (Vvbh) kai 開.
n.­271
Skt. (Sbhv) mālya; Tib. ro (“taste”).
n.­272
Tib. kha dog ’chang ba (lit., “holding color”); Skt. (Sbhv) va(rṇasaṃ)­dhāraṇe (SbhvG reads <varṇa>saṃdhāraṇe).
n.­273
S bya gag dang / mchil pa dang / ’ur bar ’thab ba dang; D bya gag dang / phug ron dang / mchil pa. Cf. Sbhv kukkuṭa­varta­kalāvaka­yuddhe (ms - varttaka -).
n.­274
Tib. shing ’dzeg pa; Skt. (Sbhv) aṭṭālavaṃśa. Cf. Chapter 5, X. Sikatin.
n.­275
Tib. phrag pa nas ’gong ba (lit. “descending from the shoulders”); Skt. (Sbhv) utsantikā. See n.­300.
n.­276
Tib. na ya’i mig; Skt. (Sbhv) ākarṣaṇe. The meaning of these words is unclear to the present translator.
n.­277
Tib. phyogs phyogs nas ’gyed pa. Skt. manuscript of the SbhvG is damaged. The meaning of these words is unclear to the present translator.
n.­278
Tib. ka le dang ka tsa le (phonetical transliteration); Skt. (Sbhv) kacale (SbhvG reads cale).
n.­279
Tib. ug shud dang / gul tshab dang; Skt. (Sbhv) akṣavaṅkānucarite. The present translation is based on Skt.
n.­280
Tib. lam ngan brjod pa’i gtam (*kumārgākhyāna­kathā?); Skt. (SbhV) kumārikākhyāna­kathā (“talk about girls”).
n.­281
For these five wrong ways of making a living, see BHSD, s.v. kuhana.
n.­282
Tib. ’bebs pa (“throwing down”); Skt. (Sbhv) āveśana (“entering”).
n.­283
Tib. kha cig skar ma’i sbyor ba byed de. Parallels in Sbhv Tib., Sbhv Skt., DĀ 25, and DĀ 27 do not include this sentence (cf. Choi 2015, 259ff.).
n.­284
For the interpretation of yud tsam rnams kyi sbyor ba (*muhūrtānāṃ prayoga) and rgyu skar shar ba (*nakṣatrānām abhyutthāna), the present translation follows explanations in the commentary of the Kṣv (D Tengyur, dzu F.167.a). Bhv Tib. agrees with DĀ 25 and DĀ 27, whereas Sbhv Skt. and Tib. provide a different reading: nakṣatrāṇaṃ prayoge muhūrttānām abhyutthāne; rgyu skar rnams la rab tu sbyor ba dang / yud tsam dang ldang ba dang. See Choi 2015, 263ff.
n.­285
Cf. ka F.297.a.
n.­286
For utilization of zombies and half zombies described in the Vvbh, see Skilling 2007.
n.­287
Tib. sbyin sreg gi sbyin sreg (lit., “burning oblations of burning oblations”). The present translation is based on the commentary on the parallel passage in the Kṣv.
n.­288
For a comparative study of the stock passage on the “noble aggregate of moral conduct,” a parallel of which appears here, see Anālayo 2016c.
n.­289
Desire, wrath, dullness, agitation and remorse, and doubt (ChDas s.v. sgrib pa; BHSD s.v. nīvaraṇa).
n.­290
The following explanation of the four dhyānas corresponds to AKBh 437.13–438.9. The simile of a bath attendant appears in AKUp 8032 (Honjō 2014, ii 870–73). The similes of a bath attendant, a lake, lotuses, and a cloth are also found in MĀc 81 and MN 119.
n.­291
Tib. khrus mkhan (= Sbhv Tib.); Skt. *snapaka (MW, s.v. snāpaka). Cf. Pāli nahāpaka (DN I 74.1, etc.). The Sbhv parallel does not preserve this word because of the physical damage to the manuscript, and the editor R. Gnoli emends the text with the word rajaka as the original Skt. of khrus mkhan. However, this emendation is problematic; as far as the present translator has been able to ascertain, the word rajaka is not translated as khrus mkhan but as btso blag mkhan in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 181.4, 211.24; D nga F.234.b, 255.b), and the original Skt. of khrus mkhan is snapaka (SbhvG ii 220.4; D nga F.260.b, etc.). Though snapaka does not seem to be grammatically correct, almost all the examples in the Sbhv show this form (snapaka) with only one exception, sūpaka, which seems to be a scribal error. The DĀ manuscript also gives snapaka (Choi 2015, 331n245).
n.­292
Tib. thur ma (“stick”); Skt. (Sbhv) iṣīkā (ms 513r3; iṣikā in Gnoli’s edition, SbhvG ii 246).
n.­293
Hereafter the six kinds of supernormal knowledge (abhijñā) are explained. Cf. AKbh 421; Mvy 201–9.
n.­294
Tib. sa dang nam mkha’ la bya ba bzhin no; Skt. (Sbhv) … gacchati tadyathā ākāśe; pṛthivyām unmajjana­nimajjanaṃ karoti tadyathā udake. The present translation omits sa dang, following Skt.
n.­295
Readers might be reminded of Ambāṣṭha’s request: “May the honorable Gautama teach the Dharma so that I will desire to attain knowledge and conduct” (6.­56), which the Buddha answers by giving the present discourse. Here, the Buddha has finished explaining “conduct” and begins to explain “knowledge” in the next paragraph.
n.­296
Here ends the correspondence with the Śrāmāṇya­phala­sūtra in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 251.13).
n.­297
Hereafter the text corresponds to DĀ 35 again (see n.­261).
n.­298
This sentence might make more sense if there were not the expression here “not actualizing the food of roots and fruits,…” but “abandon the food of roots and fruits,…” as the previous paragraphs read. However, Bhv Tib., Kṣv Tib., and DĀ 35 concur in reading “not actualizing” (Melzer 2010a, 198 = DĀ 35.97).
n.­299
These kinds of “spectacles” are already seen at 6.­80.
n.­300
Skt. utsantikā. The present translation follows the emendation of utsantikā with udyūthikā by Ramers 1996, 165. Cf., also, Melzer 2010a, 204–5.
n.­301
Here ends the abbreviation in Kṣv Ch. See n.­255.
n.­302
Melzer points out the correspondence between the following verses and the ṛṣi Kaineya’s verses in the Bhv (11.­128–11.­130), Sn 107.11–17, MN ii 135.4–10, 142.32–143.5, and MĀc 160 (error for 161?) (Melzer 2010a, 210 = DĀ 35.112).
n.­303
For this abbreviation, see 6.­11.
n.­304
DĀ 35 abbreviates the text from here to the end of the following verses.
n.­305
The following verses appear again in the Bhv, in the part that corresponds to the Nandīpālasūtra (9.­2429), and also twice in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 29, 253), regarding the second of which Dutt points out a parallel in Sn 568–69 (GM iv, 225n1). In spite of the resemblance to the Selasutta in the Sn, which contains the verses Sn 568–69, the ṛṣi Kaineya’s story in the Bhv does not contain these verses. For a comparison of these verses and other parallels, see Skilling 2003. In the verse appearing in the Sbhv Skt. and DĀ, the final part reads saṃbuddho ījyatāṃ varaḥ (Melzer 2010a, 228), “The best of those who are worshiped is the perfectly awakened one,” whereas our Tib. text seems to translate vadatāṃ “of those who are speaking” instead of ījyatāṃ “of those who are worshiped.” Either way, the verses are not simply praising the Buddha himself but imply that offering to the Buddha is most meritorious, and in that way function as applause for the donor.
n.­306
Agnihotra is an oblation to Agni, the Vedic god of fire.
n.­307
Sāvitrī is a famous brahmanical verse addressed to the sun god Savitṛ.
n.­308
The Sn does not include the above two pādas.
n.­309
Tib. rgan zhugs; Skt. mahalla. For examples of this word appearing in Buddhist texts, see Durt 1980.
n.­310
Tib. til gyi mar khu (= Kṣv Tib.) (lit., “ghee of sesame”); Skt. (DĀ 35) śaṣkulikā. Melzer points out the explanation in the commentary on the Kṣv, which explains that this food is a mixture of millet, rice flour, and sesame, rolled out and fried in butter (Melzer 2010a, 231 = DĀ 35.135).
n.­311
This short passage about an old monk who ate cake, which seems to interrupt the storyline abruptly, serves as the reason for the establishment of a rule by the Buddha at the end of the entire story of Ambāṣṭha (6.­175). This passage is found in DĀ 35, too (Melzer 2010a, 230 = DĀ 35.135), where the account of the establishment of the rule is not included. This fact could be explained by assuming some influence from the Vinaya on the Dīrghāgama.
n.­312
The text repeats the names of the four truths.
n.­313
Here ends the correspondence with the Ambāṣṭhasūtra.
n.­314
Tib. lo ma bdun pa; Skt. *Saptaparṇa? Since in the Buddha’s journey this *Saptaparṇa is located between Icchānaṅgalā and Sunrise, both said to be in the kingdom of Kosala, this account in the Bhv is unlikely to refer to Saptaparṇaguhā (Pāli Sattapaṇṇiguhā, DPPN, 1009) near Rājagṛha, as Ryūzan Nishimoto correctly notes (Nishimoto 1933–35, v. 23, 127n23).
n.­315
For this abbreviation, see II. Middle Village.
n.­316
The following passage corresponds to MĀc 212, MN 90. Cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.9. Ch. abbreviates the section with this statement: 復至日出聚落. 爲二姊妹女人, 一名賢喜, 二名明月, 廣説如經, “Again (the Blessed One departed and) arrived at Sunrise Village. For two sisters named Excellent Pleasure and Bright Moon‍—as explained in detail in the sūtra.”
n.­317
Tib. ’char ka; Skt. unknown; Ch. 日出 (“sunrise”). Cf. Ujuññā/Uruññā/Udaññā/Uduññā (CPD, s.v. Ujuññā) in MN 90 and Yutousuiruo 欝頭隨若 (phonetic transliteration) in MĀc 212.
n.­318
Tib. gnas tsher ma can gyi nags, “the forest of the place with thorns”; Skt. *Kaṇṭaka­sthala-mṛgadāva ?; Ch. no counterpart; MN 90 kaṇṇakatthalaṃ migadāyo, MĀc 212 Pujicilin 普棘刺林 “Forest Where There Are Thorns Everywhere.” The above Skt. reconstruction is based on Pāli. Cf. Mvy 3619, 4230: tsher ma = kaṇṭaka.
n.­319
Tib. mdzes ldan; nyi ldan; Skt. unknown; Ch. xianxi 賢喜 “Excellent Pleasure” and mingyue 明月 “Bright Moon.” MN 90 Somā bhaginī and Sakulā bhaginī; MĀc 212 Xian 賢 “Excellent” and Yue 月 “Moon.”
n.­320
A similar paired set consisting of asking a question and the encouragement to ask a question is seen in Skt. in the Sbhv: “pṛcchema vayaṃ bhadanta bhagavantaṃ kaṃcid eva pradeśaṃ saced avakāśaṃ kuryāt praśnasya vyākaraṇāya” “pṛccha mahārāja yad evākāṅkṣase” (SbhvG ii 219.24–26).
n.­321
Tib. ’phags skyes po; Skt. *Virūḍhaka. A son of King Prasenajit (DPPN, s.v. Viḍūḍabha). Cf. PrjvVW IV 35.8).
n.­322
Tib. bkra shis ldan gyi bu bram ze’i khye’u yang dag rgyal ba; Skt. unknown. Cf. MN 90 Sañjayo brāhmaṇo Ākāsagotto; MĀc 212. Xiang nianshao jixiangzi 想年少吉祥子 “Consciousness, the young son of Lucky.”
n.­323
Since these words that the Buddha claims to have said are identical to the words that he has denied saying in the preceding conversation, the meaning of this passage is difficult to understand. On the other hand, in MN 90 and MĀ212 the Buddha’s account is different from that of the king; the Buddha explains that he did not say that it is impossible for a śramaṇa or brahmin to know everything, but rather that it is impossible for a śramaṇa or brahmin to know everything at once. MN ii 127; Taishō no. 26, 1.793b–c.
n.­324
Note that the order of the brahmin and kṣatriya is the opposite of that in the preceding words by the king.
n.­325
Tib. rnam par ma dul ba bzhin rnam par dul ba’i cha sta len par ’gyur ram. The meaning of the words rnam par dul ba’i cha sta len pa is not clear to the present translator. The present translation is to some extent based on the following Pāli parallel in MN 90: api nu te dantā va dantakāraṇaṃ gaccheyyuṃ, dantā va dantabhūmiṃ sampāpuṇeyyun ti.
n.­326
This simile is seen in other sūtras, too, such as MN 93 Assalāyanasutta, MĀc 151 梵志阿攝惒經.
n.­327
D spa; S shing nya gro dha (“banyan tree”). The names of the four kinds of wood also differ in the MĀc and MN: MĀc east‍—a son of a kṣatriya‍—sāla wood; south‍—a son of a brahmin‍—sāla wood; west‍—a son of a householder‍—sandalwood; north‍—a son of an artisan‍—lotus (padma). MN sāka; sāla; amba; udumbara (no mention of directions or caste).
n.­328
Tib. lha gang dag … ’di lta bur ’ong zhing ’ong bar ’gyur ba (lit., “gods who … thus come and will come”). The original Skt. for ’di lta bur ’ong is presumably itthatvam āgacchati. Cf. SbhvG i 7.26–8.2; ga F.257.b.5–6 (note, however, that the manuscript of the Sbhv erroneously reads itvattham for itthatvam); BHSD, s.v. itthatva; CPD, s.v. itthatta. The Bhv’s parallel in the MN gives the following expression: ye te, mahārāja, devā savyāpajjhā te devā āgantāro itthattaṃ; ye te devā abyāpajjhā, te devā anāgantāro itthattan ti (MN ii 130.18–20).
n.­329
Here Tib. changes the translation of the name Virūḍhaka from ’phags skyes po to lus ’phags po (Skt. *Videhaka?). This irregular, probably erroneous, translation is employed in the Bhv not only for Virūḍhaka as a son of King Prasenajit but also for Virūḍhaka as one of the Four Great Kings (3.­22), though in most cases the name is translated as ’phags skyes po.
n.­330
Here ends the correspondence with MĀc 212 and MN 90.
n.­331
This section has a parallel in the Chuyao jing 出曜経 32 (Taishō no. 212, 4.760a–b).
n.­332
This verse has parallels in a number of Buddhist texts, including Uv 31.23 (Mizuno 1981, 82–83; Kudō 2004, 80–81, 248–50n21, 257). The parallel verse in Uv 31.23 concludes as follows: “Then pain follows him, as a wheel follows the footsteps of one dragging [a cart].” However, the parallel in the UvTib 31.24 is closer to the Bhv, reading: “As if his head has been cut off by a chariot.” It is worth noting that the simile of a wheel following the footsteps of an ox seems not to require further explanation for understanding it, whereas the simile of a head cut by a chariot does not make good sense without the context of the story such as given in the Bhv.
n.­333
“The king,” not the head of a guild, in the parallel in the Chuyao jing.
n.­334
Parallel to Uv 31.24, etc. See n.­332. The parallel in the Uv concludes as follows: “Then happiness follows him, as a shadow goes after [him].” Here, too, UvTib is closer to the Bhv (UvTib 31.25).
n.­335
Tib. gdu bu can (lit., “having a bracelet”); Skt. *Valaya “a bracelet”; Ch. poluoluo juluo 婆羅羅聚落 (phonetic transliteration). Cf. Valayā; gdu bu can, as a woman’s name (SbhvG ii 91; nga F.173.b). See also BHSD, s.v. “Valayā.”
n.­336
For this abbreviation, see II. Middle Village. The same applies to the following four sections. Note that the text here refers to “four buddhas” (sangs rgyas bzhi), whereas the fully narrated phrase has “four perfectly awakened ones.”
n.­337
Tib. sa can; Skt. unknown; Ch. shengtu 勝土 (“excellent ground”).
n.­338
Tib. seng ge can gyi grong (in the summary of contents, seng ge’i grong); Skt. unknown; Ch. shizi juluo 師子聚落 (“lion village”).
n.­339
Tib. grong gsar; Skt. unknown; Ch. xin juluo 新聚落 (“new village”).
n.­340
Although the place name mentioned in this section is “Where There Is a City,” the section is referred to as “City” in the summary of contents.
n.­341
Tib. grong khyer can (in the summary of contents, grong khyer); Skt. unknown; Ch. cheng 城 (“City”).
n.­342
Most of this section corresponds to SĀc 971 and SĀc2 205, with a number of differences. See Yao 2011, 3.2.20. The story is employed as an explanation of the rule that is established at the end of this section.
n.­343
This statement that the Buddha “arrived” in Rājagṛha runs in clear contradiction to the context of the Buddha’s journey in the Bhv, in which the Buddha travels from Rājagṛha to the north to convert the nāga king Apalāla. See n.­128.
n.­344
Tib. khri’u brtsegs “Layered Seats”; Skt. *Pīṭha (based on Skt. manuscript fragment of the Saṃyuktāgama. See Hosoda 1991, 175–76); Ch. zuo 座 (“Seat”), gaozuo 高座 (“High Seat”‍—two people). SĀc 971 shangzuo 上坐 (“Seated Above”); shangzuo 上座 (“Upper Seat”). SĀc2 205 chongchao 重巢 (“Layered Nest”‍—in the main text); chongchuang 重床 (“Layered Bed”‍—in the summary of contents, 453b).
n.­345
Tib. ma ga dhA bzang mo; Skt. *Sumāgadhā; Ch. mojietuo 摩掲陀 (phonetic transliteration). BHSD, s.v. Sumāgadhā.
n.­346
SĀc 971 does not mention Pīṭha’s fishing.
n.­347
The last verse, “One who does not…,” corresponds to Uv 33.16 (Mizuno 1981, 248–49), with a difference in the last pāda: “I call him brahmin” in both the Uv and UvTib.
n.­348
Here ends the story in SĀc 971.
n.­349
This section corresponds to Divy 4 Brāhmaṇa­dārikāvadāna (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 135–42). There is also a parallel in the Dazhidulun 大智度論, Taishō no. 1509, 25.115a–b (Hiraoka 2009, 43). The present translation follows Divy 4 regarding the restoration of proper names in this section.
n.­350
Ch. and Divy 4 do not abbreviate the stock passage about the Buddha’s smile but give it in full. For the entire stock passage, see 8.­113–2.­66.
n.­351
Tib. ba’i ko ba; Skt. (Divy 4) gopiṭaka (BHSD, q.v.); Ch. niuqie 牛篋 (Skt. = Ch. = “cow basket”). After this word, Ch. gives pangji 篣箕 (“winnow”).
n.­352
Tib. zhing snag che ba ser sme ba dog sa tshwa sgo ma mchis pa’i phyogs su; Skt. (Divy 4) kṣetraṃ tāvad bho gautama nirupahataṃ snigdha­madhura­mṛttikā­pradeśam. Because of the difficulty in understanding Tib., the present translation is based on Skt. in the Divy.
n.­353
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­354
This section corresponds to SĀc 813 and SN 54.10. The text in the Bhv is too abbreviated to make adequate sense. See Yao 2011, 3.2.21 and forthcoming a. Regarding the mindfulness of breathing in and breathing out explained in this section, see Choong 2000, 225–27.
n.­355
Here Ch. abbreviates this section with the statement 此經廣説如雜阿笈摩, “This sūtra should be recited as explained in detail in the Saṃyuktāgama.”
n.­356
What is abbreviated here cannot be explained in the Bhv itself. SĀc 813 gives a similar text to the Bhv here, without any indication of an abbreviation. The abbreviated text is to be supplied by a passage in a preceding sūtra, SĀc 803. Cf. n.­238 for a similar problem.
n.­357
For the text abbreviated here, see Chapter Six, I. Icchānaṅgalā, 6.­4.
n.­358
Both the Bhv and SĀc 813 do not clearly state what this simile of a dust stūpa means; in SN 54.10 it is connected to how a monk breaks “evil and unwholesome things” (SN v 325.6–8).
n.­360
The first half of this section corresponds to the first half of SĀc 36 and SN 22.43 (this part has been translated into English in Dhammadinnā 2014), and the second half of the section corresponds to the second half of SĀc 813 (see I. Kimpilā in this chapter). See Yao 2011, 3.2.22 and Yao forthcoming a. Cf., also, SĀc 639, which includes the teachings about “the island that is yourself,” etc., and is set in the same place.
n.­361
Ch. abbreviates the section with the statement 相應住中廣説其事, “This subject is explained in detail in the Saṃyuktāgama.” SN 22.43, unlike the Bhv and SĀc 36, does not set this teaching in Mathurā but in Sāvatthī.
n.­362
Tib. rab tu bzang ldan. Although the Skt. folios are lost for this part, we find a similar Tib. name, ’bab chu rab tu bzang po, and its Skt. counterpart in another part of the Bhv (11.­56; GM 266.3–4).
n.­363
A more detailed explanation of this subject has been given previously in the Bhv, 4.­12–4.­15.
n.­364
Here ends the correspondence with the first half of SĀc 36, and hereafter the text corresponds to SĀc 813, which we have already seen in the first section of this chapter (note, however, that there was no sentence beginning “O monks, look…”).
n.­365
Note that the mode of address by the Buddha to the listener(s) changes here from “monks” to “Ānanda,” as pointed out by Hosoda (Hosoda 2006, 15).
n.­366
This section parallels MĀc 132, MN 82, and the Rāṣṭra­pāla­sūtra that survives in Skt. manuscript (Waldschmidt 1980). For a comparative text of the Rāṣṭra­pāla­sūtra and Bhv Tib., see Matsumura 1985. Cf., also, Anālayo 2011a, i 451–66; ii 1047–48. The story of Rāṣṭrapāla is narrated in verse in a later part of the Bhv, in the Anavatapta­gāthā section (9.­1875).
n.­367
Here Ch. abbreviates the section with this statement: 於此廣説護國蘇怛羅經, “Here the Rāṣṭra­pāla­sūtra should be recited in detail.”
n.­368
Tib. shin tu gzhon pa (lit., “very young”). The present translation is based on the presumed original Skt. sukumāra. Cf. 9.­882. Cf., also, PrjvVW I 304 folio 8v5; ka F.20.b.6.
n.­369
In MN 82, the old woman is not able to speak to Raṭṭhapāla because, according to Buddhaghosa’s commentary, he is a great person who has exhausted his defilements.
n.­370
There is a scene in the story of Mahāsudarśana in the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra in the Kṣv (MPS 34.137) in which a king shocks his consort by addressing her as sister, implying that he no longer has sexual desire for her, just like Rāṣṭrapāla in the present story.
n.­371
The following verses have parallels in TheraG 769–73, Uv 27.20–25, etc. (Mizuno 1993, 26).
n.­372
S gsar; D gser. Cf. Uv 27.25 añjanīva navā citrā (“like a new, variegated collyrium pot”). See Matsuyama 1980–2002, no. 22.
n.­373
P rul ba’i; D dul ba’i; S rus pa’i.
n.­374
The text says bang mdzod stug po can gang na ba der: “to Sthūlakoṣṭhaka,” not “to Sthūlakoṣṭhaka Forest.” However, judging from the context, it is likely that this indicates the forest.
n.­375
The following list of various kinds of servants is seen in Skt. in the Śrāmāṇya­phala­sūtra in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 220.1–4; nga F.260.b).
n.­376
Most of the following verses have parallels in the TheraG (776–79, 781, 783–88).
n.­377
Cf. SN i 2.22–23, 26–27, SĀc 1001.
n.­378
The story in this section has a parallel in the Stuti­brāhmaṇāvadāna, chapter 5 of the Divy (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17, i 143–49). Étienne Lamotte has identified the place names that appear in this and the following sections, although he has not given in full the grounds for his identifications (Lamotte 1951, 152–58).
n.­379
Ch. and Divy do not abbreviate this stock passage.
n.­380
A parallel story appears in a manuscript of an avadāna anthology dated to the fifth century (Merv-av, 319).
n.­381
This statement seems contradictory in the context, and the present translator has not been able to solve the problem fully: it was the elephant who was praised and the king who gave the villages to the brahmin, and the Buddha cannot be both at the same time. Skt. (Divy), tadāpy aham anenaikayā gāthayā stuto mayā cāyaṃ pañca­grāma­vareṣu pratiṣṭhāpitaḥ, lit., “Then I was praised by him with a single verse, and he was put in five excellent villages by me.” This could be interpreted in another way, as Rotman does, separating the first-person pronoun mayā (“by me”) in the second half of the sentence and the agent of the past passive participle pratiṣṭhāpitaḥ (“put, established”) so as to resolve the above problem: “Back then he praised me with a single verse, and I caused him to be put in charge of five excellent villages” (Rotman 2008–17, i 148). So too could Tib. be interpreted: ngas ’di la grong mchog lnga byin no, “Because of me, five excellent villages were given to him” (?). However, in both versions the first-person pronoun seems more likely to indicate the agent of the verb. Ch. explicitly presents this “contradictory” interpretation: 我賜與五聚落, “I bestowed five villages [on him].” Hiraoka and Przyluski adopt the same interpretation in their Japanese and French translations of Divy 5 and this part of Ch., respectively (Hiraoka 2007, i 156; Przyluski 1914, 497).
n.­382
For this abbreviation, see II. Middle Village.
n.­383
The first half of the Indra­nāma­brāhmaṇāvadāna, chapter 6 of the Divy, is parallel to this section (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17, i 151–59; for other parallels, see Hiraoka 2011, 236–37).
n.­384
According to an unnamed source AKUp 3024 quotes, this is one of the eighty minor marks of the Buddha (Honjō 2014, i 317–32).
n.­385
Here ends the correspondence to the first half of Divy 6. The second half of Divy 6 corresponds to a story in chapter 9 of the Bhv (C. Toyikā). According to Iwamoto, these halves of Divy 6 seem to have been wrongly combined in the compilation process of the Divy, when they were extracted from the Bhv (Iwamoto 1967, 135–37; Hiraoka 2007, i 168 n.14; Rotman 2008–17, i 419n432).
n.­386
The beginning of the following story resembles a part of the story of Miṇḍhaka in the Bhv (10.­68–10.­72).
n.­387
Cf. Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, XLII (English trsl. from Bhv Tib.); Chavannes 1910–11, ii 420–24 (French trsl. from Bhv Ch.); Merv-av 295.
n.­388
For this miracle, see Kṣv D a F.40.a–53.b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.329–333; Divy 12 Prātihārya­sūtra (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17 , i 253–87).
n.­389
S chos thob par gyur cig/ chos thob par gyur cig; D chos thos par gyur cig/ chos thob par gyur cig (cf. 10.­68; Wille 1990, 114). Rotman notes the correspondence between this expression and “an exclamation that Jain renunciants make during their almsrounds” (Rotman 2008–17, i 426n531).
n.­390
Tib. de ci zhig (lit., “What is that?”). Judging from the context, de (“that”) here seems to refer not to the literal meaning of the words of the non-Buddhist ascetics‍—“May the Dharma be attained!”‍—but to their sudden, unexpected greeting, hence the above translation.
n.­391
Unlike the previous sentences, here “hamlets” is plural: ri brags rnams.
n.­392
English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, XLII. Parallel stories: J 177; Merv-av, 295.
n.­393
For this abbreviation, see II. Middle Village.
n.­394
BhvY 7.10.1 (p. 227ff.). This story has a parallel in the Muktaka in the Ug: pa F.198.b.1–199.a.4; Taishō no. 1452, 24.454b–c.
n.­395
Tib. glang chen stobs; Skt. unknown (*Hastibala? Przyluski 1914, 505); Ch. 象力. Cf. Ug: Tib. bal glang ldan; Ch. dali 大力 (“big power”).
n.­396
Tib. sgra sgrogs. Cf. 3.­207. “*Kuñjika,” mistakenly, in BhvY 111 and 227. Cf. SbhvG ii 47.21 (ms 442r10). Cf. Ug: Tib. uniko; Ch. dadejia 達底迦 (phonetical transliteration).
n.­397
Tib. khang skyong; Skt. unknown; Ch. 執事人. Tib. suggests Skt. *vihārapāla; Ch. *upadhivārika (Taishō 24.16a 授事之人; Divy 50 upadhivārika; 2.­318 dge skos). For these titles of officials in Indian Buddhist monasteries, see Silk 2008, 110ff. and 143ff.
n.­398
In the Ug, not only grapes but also some other fruits are listed: Tib. rgun ’brum dang / bal po se’u dang / ’bra go la sogs pas (“grapes, pomegranates, persimmons, etc.”); Ch. 葡萄石榴甘橘甘蔗胡桃渇樹羅等 (“grapes, pomegranates, oranges, sugarcanes, walnuts, dates, etc.”).
n.­399
By eating fruits just as they have been given as offerings, monastics can infringe against the rule prohibiting killing plants and seeds (Vvbh cha F.276.a–287.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.775c–777a). Therefore, the fruits must be made “suitable” (Mvy 9388: rung ba = kalpika) to consume, i.e., damaged, before eating. Ten kinds of procedures for this are established in the Vvbh (ja F.157.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.826a), including making them “suitable by fire,” which is mentioned here. Cf., also, Kishino 2016, 252.
n.­400
dus ma yin pa’i btung ba (lit., “drink for an inappropriate time”). Grape juice is included in the eight kinds of drinks that are medicines to be consumed at night; see 1.­11.
n.­401
BhvY 7.10.2 (p. 228ff.). The following story of the Buddha’s travel to the north to convert the nāga king Apalāla is narrated in different texts (Ono 1916, 91–100, 482–89; Lamotte 1966, 130–36). Place names vary considerably in these sources.
n.­402
This expression is repeated later in the Bhv: 8.­213.
n.­403
Tib. dran dang ldan rnams bzang por shog. Although it is clear from the context that these verses are meant for the yakṣa Vajrapāṇi alone, the audience of the verses is addressed in the plural.
n.­404
The present translation uses the following items of the section index as subsection titles, which cover the tenth to twelfth sections of Chapter 7. This section index is absent in Ch.
n.­405
This keyword, “Forest,” does not tally with any of the following stories.
n.­406
Tib. mchog gi ma (“Mother of the Best”). The present translation is based on the sentence to which this keyword refers: K. In Dhānyapura, Converting the Mother of Best Army.
n.­407
Tib. phyugs skyong ( “herdsman”). The present translation is based on the sentence to which this keyword refers: A. Bhavadeva’s, Caṇḍālī’s Seven Sons’, and the Yakṣa Earth-Protector’s Conversion in Nandivardhana.
n.­408
According to the Crv, this mountain constitutes the northern boundary of the midland region (GM iv 190).
n.­409
BhvY 7.10.3 (p. 230).
n.­410
Although Przyluski reconstructed the Sanskrit of this name as “Bodhibala” (1914, 508), he did not give any evidence other than Ch. jueli 覚力 and Tib. sangs rgyas stobs. Tib. could rather suggest “Buddhabala.”
n.­411
In Ch., people donate requisites to the monastery that the yakṣa has built.
n.­412
Ch. “Preserve my shoulder bone in this place after I am completely emancipated.”
n.­413
BhvY 7.10.4 (p. 231).
n.­414
Tib. re tu ka; Ch. nidelejia 泥徳勒迦 (phonetical transliteration). Przyluski has reconstructed the Skt. as “Netraka(?)” (1914, 509). The resemblances between re and ne and between tra and tu in some types of scripts may support this reconstruction.
n.­415
BhvY 7.10.5 (p. 231).
n.­416
BhvY 7.10.6 (p. 231).
n.­417
drang srong mgo reg dang ril ba spyi blugs can. It is unclear to the present translator whether these words translate the name of one ṛṣi or the names of two ṛṣis, i.e., mgo reg, “Shaved Head,” and ril ba spyi blugs can, “Who Has a Water Jar.” Ch. zhangguan xianren 杖灌仙人 (*ṛṣir Daṇḍakamaṇḍaluḥ “a ṛṣi (named) Water Jar with a Handle”). Note the resemblance between *daṇḍa (“stick,” “handle”) and *muṇḍa (“shaved”).
n.­418
BhvY 7.10.7 (p. 231ff.).
n.­419
S me; D mi.
n.­420
This conversation is similar to that in Pūrṇa’s story in the Bhv, 2.­255, where Skt. in the Divy is problematic and Tib. does not include the phrase “why do I harass you?” (Shackleton Bailey 1950, 179). The present translator had to add the sentence “You are harassing me,” which appears in the Pūrṇa story, for otherwise the next sentence “If I…” does not make good sense.
n.­422
ri bo. Cf. ri bo can (“Mountain”) earlier in the Bhv (2.­407).
n.­423
From this point the Skt. manuscript (fol. 141ff.) is available; however, GM (page A, i.e., two pages before page 1; cf. Wille 1990, 154) does not include a transliteration from the first line to the first few words of the third line of folio 141r. Below is a transliteration by the present translator: 1 /// .y. śaraṇa­gamana­śikṣā­padāni dattāni tato vajra­pāṇir apalālaṃ sa­suhṛtsanbandhi­bāndhavaṃ vinayam upagataṃ dṛṣṭvā pravṛttaḥ 2 /// r. r iva śikharais sotsukhair niṣpatadbhiḥ āyāsādhmāta­kaṇṭhais svabhavana­puruṣais tiryag udvīkṣya­māṇāṃ vyāhārair niṣpalālair bhuja 3 /// yāsanāt prakrāntaḥ adrākṣīd bhagavāṃ dūrād eva nīlanīlāṃ vanarājiṃ dṛṣṭvā ca punar vajra­pāṇiṃ yakṣam āmantrayate | paśyasi. There is an interesting difference between Ch. and Tib. here: in Ch. Apalāla, instead of asking the Buddha not to give the rules of training to his son, asks the Buddha to give the rules to other nāgas who are his enemies. Despite the damage to the ms, Skt. seems to correspond rather to Ch. (see line 1 of above transliteration).
n.­424
Ch. zhijingangshou pusa 執金剛手菩薩 (“*the bodhisattva Vajrapāṇi”) only here‍—in other places in the Bhv, zhijingangshen 執金剛神 (“the god Vajrapāṇi”) or jingangshou yaocha 金剛手藥叉 (“the yakṣa Vajrapāṇi”). Probably the word “bodhisattva” was inserted by mistake since zhijingang pusa 執金剛菩薩 is a name frequently seen in tantric literature, including texts translated by Yijing such as the Yaoshi liuliguang qifo benyuan gongde jing 藥師琉璃光七佛本願功徳經.
n.­425
Ch. lacks this verse.
n.­426
BhvY 7.10.8 (p. 233).
n.­427
GM Mādhyandino.
n.­428
GM Huluṭaṃ (Hulutu, mistakenly, in BhvY 233n4).
n.­429
Note that the motif of conversion of a nāga is repeated (Apalāla; Huluḍa). This prediction is conveyed by Ānanda to Madhyandina and realized by the latter in the Kṣv (da F.321.a–322.b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.410c), though in the Bhv the prediction is told to Vajrapāṇi, not Ānanda. The sentence “The country of Kaśmīra consists of the city and sixty thousand towns, six thousand towns, and sixty-three towns” is in verse in Sanskrit, whereas it is in prose in Tibetan, which seems to be the main reason for the repetition of “towns.”
n.­430
BhvY 7.10.9 (p. 233ff.).
n.­431
GM bhraṣṭālāyām.
n.­432
BhvY 7.10.10 (p. 234).
n.­433
BhvY 7.10.11 (p. 234).
n.­434
BhvY 7.10.12 (p. 234).
n.­435
The following conversation does not make good sense to the present translator: Tib. des gsol pa / “bskams nas ’bebs so” // “nga yang bskams nas ’bebs so” // “khyod dang bdag mnyam lags so” // “’di kho nar zad dam ci / nga ni so btang nas kyang ’bebs so” // “khyod lhag go” // “so gtong ba ’ba’ zhig tu yang ma zad do // ’o na ci zhe na, gser dang, dngul dang / bai dUrya dang / shel gyi rang bzhin du yang byed do” //; Skt. (GM A.17–20; ms 141r8–9) sa kathayati “śuṣkāṇi(ms śuṣkāni)” “aham api śuṣkāṇy(ms śuṣkāny) avatārayāmi” “samas tvaṃ mayā” “kim e  …  (ms broken) ” “  …  (vaiḍū)ryasphaṭi<ka>ma[y](āny ap)i”; Ch. 陶師答言。 “乾成而下。” 化人報曰。 “我亦乾成而下。” “汝共我同。” “然我有異術。獨能輪上成熟將下。” 陶師答言。 “汝技過我。” 化人報曰。 “非直輪上出成熟器。亦能更出七寶諸器。.”
n.­436
GM pālitakoṭo. The ms is hard to read even in the new facsimile edition (pā.i[ta] .. ..), but it looks more like pālitakūṭe, which is more likely in terms of grammar (locative) and correspondence to Tib. and Ch.: brtsegs skyong, huji 護積 (“Heap-Protector”). BHSD’s entry, “Pālitakoṭa, n. of a yakṣa king,” which refers to this sentence in the Bhv, should probably be corrected.
n.­437
Cf. Divy 26 and 27, in related context, “Gopālī” (Divy 348.20–22, 385.3–5).
n.­438
Tib. gtum byed; Ch. zhantuli 栴荼梨 (phonetical transliteration). Skt. is lost in the ms due to physical damage; the present Skt. reconstruction is based on Ch.
n.­439
Tib. sa ’tsho (in the Section Index, phyugs skyong, see 7.­211); Skt. damaged in the ms; Ch. huchi 護池 (“Pond-Protector” (so reads the second Goryeo edition; however, it might be a misprint for hudi 護地 (“Earth-Protector”)).
n.­440
This story has parallels in the Binaiye 鼻奈耶 (Taishō no. 1464, 24.858a) and the Apidamo dapiposha lun 阿毘達磨大毘婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1545, 27.28b–29b).
n.­441
Tib. ’gro mgyogs (cf. Mvy 9475); Skt. damaged in the ms; Ch. ashifujia 阿濕縛迦 (phonetical transliteration). A monk famous for misconduct along with Punarvasuka (these are two members of the group of six). See DPPN s.v. “Assaji-Punabbasukā”; ŚavG 52; PLv § 3.1.
n.­442
Tib. nab so (cf. Mvy 9473); Skt. damaged in the ms; Ch. bunaposu 布捺婆素 (phonetical transliteration). “Punarvasu” in BhvY 235n9 should be corrected on the basis of examples in the Śav and PLv in the previous note.
n.­443
For narrative examples of the Buddha’s act of leaving an image of himself, see, e.g., Xuanzang’s travel record, and Taishō no. 2087, 51.879a; 898b; 915b; 946c, each being connected with the motif of the conversion of a nāga by the Buddha. Cf., also, Yamabe 2009, 73.
n.­444
Tib. sbu bu can dang sbubs can; Skt. damaged in the ms; Ch. nalijia 那利迦  …  natudaye 那荼達耶 (phonetical transliteration). GM Nālī Udaryā, ms Nāḍi .. .. ḍadaryā. The present reconstruction is partially based on Ch. Cf. Mmvr 35.4 (Toh 559) (Nāḍikā as the name of a rākṣasī); Bhv 8.­120 (sbu bu can as a translation of Naḍera).
n.­445
There is an inconsistency with the context here, probably caused by careless application of a stock passage: the Buddha is not accompanied by the community of monks but only by the yakṣa Vajrapāṇi.
n.­446
Skt. and Ch. do not mention the name Kuṣāṇa. For this mention of Kaniṣka, see Schopen 2004a, 20 and 38n8.
n.­447
Xuanzang, in the section on Gandhāra in the account of his journey, narrates in detail the story of the prediction about King Kaniṣka and his stūpa. According to this account, the Buddha spoke this prediction to Ānanda, not to Vajrapāṇi (Taishō no. 2087, 51.879c–880a; English trsl., Li 1996, 71ff.).
n.­449
Ch. da xing shen’e 大性甚惡. Da 大 (so reads the second Goryeo edition: 37.662b) seems to be a misprint for quan 犬.
n.­450
Cf. the five “advantages” of the northern region claimed by the Buddha before leaving Rājagṛha (3.­52). The first three disadvantages correspond to the first three of the “five disadvantages of Mathurā” mentioned later (8.­65). The reading of GM is rather problematic here: sthāṇukaṇṭakadrumapāṣāṇaśarkaraś caṇḍakukkuro duṣṭhulasamudācāro mātṛgrāmaḥ | ; ms 142r7–8: u[tk]ūlani(kūlā)ḥ sthāṇuk[a](ṇṭakadhānā) [b](a)hupāṣāṇ[a]śark[ara]<ka>pālaś caṇḍa (952.r8) kukkuro duṣṭhula­samudācāromātṛ­grāmaḥ.
n.­451
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­452
The Sbhv gives the story of the beginnings of kingship, in which the first king in the world is called Mahāsammata (SbhvG i 15; ga F.262.b). However, in the story in the Sbhv there is no mention of either the place name or the anointing of the king.
n.­453
A good, precious horse (Tib. rta bzang po rin po che; Skt. bhadram aśvaratnaṃ) is one of the seven treasures of a wheel-turning king. See 8.­162–8.­166.
n.­454
This prediction has parallels in Divy 26 and 27, SĀc 604 and 640. Cf., also, AKBh 183.10, AKUp 3097 (Honjō 2014, i 467). In the Kṣv, the prediction is repeated by Ānanda to Śāṇakavāsin after the nirvāṇa of the Buddha and Mahākāśyapa (da F.320.b.1–4; Taishō no. 1451, 24.410b).
n.­455
GM uramuṇḍo.
n.­456
The monk who lets Upagupta go forth is called Śāṇakavāsin in Divy 26 (349.9).
n.­457
Cf. Strong 1992, 44–45 (English trsl. from Skt. Bhv); Deeg 2007, 46–47 (English trsl. from the Divy).
n.­458
Pañcatapas, “fivefold heat,” means fires set in four directions and the sun as the fifth (MW, q.v.).
n.­459
For Skt. parallels to this story, see Wille 2014a, 193; 2014b, 230.
n.­460
This sentence is problematic, since it has already been stated at the beginning of III. Mathurā that the Buddha went to Mathurā. The situation seems to resemble that of the Ambāṣṭhasūtra (see n.­243).
n.­461
Tib. brtul zhugs bsgrubs pas brtul zhugs shin tu rdzogs (lit., “[your] vow is well perfected through a/the complete vow”); Skt. susamāpta­vrata­sādhita­vrataḥ.
n.­462
Tib. stobs ldan khyod kyi ting ’dzin zad med pas; Skt. balavāṃś ca samādhir avyayas tava (“Your meditation is powerful and inexhaustible”). Tib. seems to take the adjective balavat, “powerful,” in the vocative (*balavaṃś ?) as “you, O Powerful One.” However, when understood in this way, the meaning of the comparison of meditation to Nārāyaṇa, “a proverbially powerful personage” (BHSD, q.v.), is lost.
n.­463
Ch. abbreviates the following verses.
n.­464
This verse seems to refer to one of the ten powers of the Buddha (cf. Mvy 124).
n.­465
This verse in Tib. consists of only three lines, missing the last quarter, which is preserved in the Sanskrit text: “Being abused and being venerated are also the same.”
n.­466
Skt. pāna; Tib. stsang nas (“barley gruel”).
n.­467
This verse consists of only three lines, missing the second quarter of it, which is preserved in Sanskrit: “And if you have no property, O Muni.”
n.­468
Cf. the simile of an adze and sandalwood paste (e.g., 2.­10; 3.­12).
n.­469
Skt. for this line gives “those who are unsteady and bold, and those connected to pleasure.”
n.­470
Tib. “with these you never associate,” which makes less sense here. The present translation is based on Skt.
n.­471
Cf. “the five disadvantages of the northern region” (7.­271). Cf., also, AN 5.220, a short sutta that lists the five disadvantages of Madhurā [sic]: uneven land; much dust; fierce dogs; harmful yakṣas; and difficulties in obtaining almsfood (AN iii 256). Cf. Deeg 2007, 53–54. Buddhaghosa’s commentary on this sutta gives a story similar to this passage in the Bhv, a story of the Buddha’s visit to Madhurā hindered by a yakkhinī (AA iii 329).
n.­472
Tib. dgongs ka za ba; Skt. uccahnabhaktā (GM: uccandra­bhaktāḥ), “having a meal at noon” (cf. SWTF, s.v. uccāhna); Ch. 人民獨食 (“people eat alone”). BHSD “uccandrabhakta,” which is based on GM, should be corrected. The present translation follows Tib.
n.­473
The ms spells this name Gardabhaka later in this story. The name of this yakṣa appears in the Mahā­māyūrī­vidyā­rājñī, too, being related to Mathurā (Mmvr 20)(Toh 559).
n.­474
Neither Skt. nor Ch. gives the following etymology of the yakṣa’s name (see n.­475).
n.­475
This explanation of the harm caused by the yakṣa is slightly different from what has been said about the etymology of the yakṣa’s name earlier in the story, which is only in Tib.
n.­476
This story is entitled Otalāyanasūtra in Skt., in which the story is abbreviated, and corresponds to SN 48.42 and AKUp 9005. Fumio Enomoto has suggested that the SĀc once included a parallel sūtra to this in a fascicle that is lost today (Enomoto 1984). See Yao 2011, 3.2.25, and forthcoming a.
n.­477
Skt. brāhmaṇa­mahā­śālaḥ (lit., “a brahmin [possessing] a large hall”); Tib. bram ze shing sa’ la chen po lta bu (lit. “a brahmin like a large sāla tree”). For the usage of this word in Sanskrit and Pāli literature (Pāli: brāhmaṇamahāsāla), see Tsuchida 1991, esp. 60ff.
n.­478
The following story of peasants and oxen is absent in Ch.
n.­479
“The Dharma that consists of three phrases” appears later in the Bhv with more details (8.­280).
n.­480
The present translation has added the words “these oxen” to Tib., following Skt.
n.­481
Skt. narrates this part more briefly and abbreviates the rest of the sūtra: “The brahmin Otalāyana heard that the śramaṇa Gautama had arrived at Otalā and was staying in Otalā Forest near Otalā. (The Otalāyanasūtra, in detail, in the Mārgavarga section in the Saṃyuktāgama.)” Ch. is concise, too, regarding the beginning of the scene of Otalāyana’s visit (whereas it gives the main part of the story in full): “Then there was a brahmin named Otalāyana. When he heard that the Blessed One was in that forest, he rode a chariot pulled by white horses . . . .”
n.­482
The following statement by the Buddha is quoted in chap. 9 of the Abhi­dharma­kośa­bhāṣya (AKBh 464.17–20).
n.­483
Here ends the abbreviation in Skt. In Ch. here, the brahmin is said to “rejoice” in the Buddha’s words and depart from the presence of the Buddha. The same thing is also stated in AKUp 9005 and SN 48.42, concluding or nearly concluding each sūtra (a concluding remark by the Buddha follows this in the SN version). However, the expression “rejoiced in the Buddha’s words,” a very common ending of sūtras and therefore natural in the AKUp and SN versions, obviously contradicts the following development of the story in the Bhv in which the brahmin makes a malicious wish about the Buddha. It is likely that the redactors of the Bhv at some stage noticed the need to delete the concluding sentence of the Otalāyanasūtra for consistency and actually did so, hence the absence of the expression “rejoiced in the Buddha’s words” in Tib. In contrast, Ch. here seems to represent an earlier stage of textual transmission in which this sentence was carelessly preserved, or to suggest separate insertion of the sūtra in different textual lineages. Cf. Yao forthcoming a.
n.­484
Skt. ārṣā gāthā. Tib. gtsug lag khang gi tshigs su bcad pa (D, P, S) seems to have been mistakenly written for gtsug lag gi tshigs su bcad pa (Mvy 1432; Schopen [2004b] 2014, 355n32). See n.­485.
n.­485
Gregory Schopen has pointed out “a prophylactic function” of “ārṣa verses,” referring to this passage in the Bhv and other examples in the Kṣv (Schopen [2004b] 2014, 341–42). Yijing in his translation of the Vvbh adds his own explanation of situations in which the alishagata 阿利沙伽他 (phonetical transliteration of ārṣā gāthā) should be recited and quotes the verses (Taishō no. 1442, 23.903b25–c5; Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga, Taishō no. 1443, 23.1019a). The main text of the Kṣv Ch. also includes the verses (Taishō no. 1451, 24.274b).
n.­486
For comparative studies of the parallel stories of Kacaṅgalā, see Durt 2005, Muldoon-Hules 2009, and Matsumoto 2010. In addition to the parallels referred to by Durt, see Merv-av, 210–11.
n.­487
Tib. phyi bzhin ’brang ba’i dge sbyong; Skt. paścācchramaṇa. See Schopen [2012] 2014, 154n12.
n.­488
Skt. and Ch. “an old woman,” without the meaning of “slave.” In Skt., only later in the story does it become clear that this woman is actually a slave or dependent on another (“having gained permission from her master [svāmin],” 8.­105; “poor female slave [daridrā dāsī],” 8.­108). Perhaps the term bran mo (“female slave”) in Tib. here was added in order to make the story flow more smoothly. Cf. Muldoon-Hules 2009, 120–22. It is worth noting that in Ch. the woman’s servitude remains unclear throughout the story, because there the above-mentioned svāmin (“master”) is translated as fu 夫 (“husband”), as Skt. could also mean, and daridrā dāsī “poor female slave” as pinjian 貧賤 (“poor and lowly”).
n.­489
Durt has remarked that this scene is narrated in greater detail in the Aś version than in the Bhv, especially referring to the milk bursting from Kacaṅgalā’s breast (2005, 71–72, 76–77). See also Muldoon-Hules 2009, esp. 114–20.
n.­490
The following verses are translated as prose in Ch.
n.­491
For this stock passage about becoming an arhat/arhantī, see 2.­10.
n.­492
This detail of the former aspiration of Kacaṅgalā significantly resembles that of the nun Dharmadinnā, whose story is narrated in the Kṣv (da F.169.b–170.a). Given the narrative inconsistency in the latter, it seems likely that the former life story of Dharmadinnā is rather an insertion made by copying that of Kacaṅgalā. See Yao 2017.
n.­493
The story of Uttara, including the prediction about him, is narrated later in the Bhv (g. Uttara).
n.­494
S  btsal: D  brtsal. For this verse, see the parallel at 3.­138 and n.­148.
n.­496
This story, in which the Buddha and his monks have to eat horse-fodder barley during the rainy-season retreat despite a brahmin king’s promise to provide food for them, has parallels in different vinayas and other sources. Hirakawa has noted that the story’s subject and location in vinaya s differ: in the Pāli Vinaya, the Sifen lü (Dharmaguptaka Vinaya), and the Wufen lü (Mahīśāsaka Vinaya), this story is located in the introductory section of the entire vinaya as the account of the event that caused the Buddha to declare the general principle that each regulation should be established only after some practical problem has arisen. In the Shisong lü (the so-called Sarvāstivāda Vinaya) and the MSV (Bhv), utterly unrelated to the above principle, the story is focused on a karmic teaching about the Buddha’s evil action in his former life and its result in the present (Hirakawa 1993–95, i 107–115). The following is the plot of these parallels (proper names, etc., based on the Bhv): 1. The Buddha arrives at Vairambhya (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 2. A brahmin (king) asks the Buddha questions (Pā = AN 8.11; MĀc 157, etc.). 3. The brahmin (king) offers food, etc., for the rainy-season retreat (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 4. The brahmin fails to carry out the above offer and the Buddha and monks experience difficulty in obtaining food (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 5. A caravan leader offers horse-fodder barley to the Buddha (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi; Bhv). 6. Mahā­maudgalyāyana offers to resolve the matter using his magical power, but the Buddha refuses (Pā; Si; Wu; Shi = EĀc 42.3; MPS 31.56–83). 7. A woman cooks the barley (Shi; Bhv = SĀc 722 [parallel only to Bhv]). 8. Śāriputra requests the Buddha to establish the rules of training, but the Buddha refuses (Pā; Si; Wu). 9. Only after the rainy-season retreat, the brahmin (king) realizes that the food has not been provided. He repents and offers food to the Buddha (Pā; Wu; Shi; Bhv). Park 2012 also gives a comparison of the parallel stories. For another parallel, see Rosen 1959, 165–68.
n.­497
Tib. rgyal po bram ze; Skt. brāhmaṇarājā. Although kings in ancient India are generally supposed to have belonged to the kṣatriya class, here is a reference to a king who is a brahmin.
n.­498
Ch. baizhang 白帳 (“white curtain”) instead of “his own intestine” (so reads the second Goryeo edition: 37.667c)‍—baizhang 白帳 might be a misprint for zichang 自腸. This dream partially corresponds to that of King Dhana in the story of Prince Sudhana in the Bhv (9.­617). The motif of the intestine encircling a city is also seen in the Sumāgadhāvadāna (Sumav paragraph 252).
n.­499
Skt. (ms) apaṇyībhaviṣyati; Tib. lo ma par yang mi ’gyur bas (*aparṇī-? So reads GM).
n.­500
This verse is abbreviated in Tib. and Skt.; Ch. gives it in full. See 2.­345.
n.­501
On the following story of a woman who wished to be the queen of a wheel-turning king, cf. Dhammadinnā 2015–16. Cf., also, Finnegan 2009, 72–82.
n.­502
Although it is not problematized in this story, Ānanda’s speech about the “seven” treasures to the woman could break the rule against a monk’s preaching Dharma “exceeding five or six phrases” to a woman without male company (Vvbh cha F.255.b–259.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.770b23–771c6). “Five or six phrases” here means the number of the phrases that constitute a teaching (e.g., the teaching on the five aggregates: “Form is impermanent. . . . Consciousness is impermanent” consists of five phrases). The following passages correspond to part of SĀc 722, DN 17, MN 129, etc., despite the difference in the narrative circumstances in which the sermon is given.
n.­503
The following explanation of the precious chakra of a wheel-turning king has a parallel in AKUp 3098, which is an abbreviated quotation from “the second sūtra of the Chapter Connected to Kings [in the Madhyamāgama]” (Honjō 2014, i 467ff.). It is unclear which sūtra this reference in the AKUp indicates: Honjō, mentioning the identification of AKUp 3098 with MĀc 70, 轉輪王經 Zhuanlunwangjing (The Sūtra of the Wheel-Turning King) by other scholars, notes that AKUp 3098 corresponds more literally to MĀc 67, the Datiannailinjing 大天㮈林經 (The Sūtra of Mahādeva’s Mango Grove) rather than to MĀc 70. The problem is the fact that the sūtra about King Mahādeva, parallel to MĀc 67, is quoted as “the twelfth sūtra in the Chapter Connected to Kings” in AKUp 2050. Honjō suggests possible confusion of “second” with “twelfth.” However, there is another problem: although MĀc 67 gives a full explanation of the seven treasures of a wheel-turning king, this explanation is abbreviated in both Mūla­sarvāstivādin parallels to the sūtra, i.e., AKUp 2050 and the Mahādevasūtra in the Bhv, Chapter Four, III. Mithilā). It is possible that the Mūla­sarvāstivādin version of the Madhyamāgama did have a sūtra that included the description of the precious chakra (or all seven treasures) as the second sūtra of the Chapter Connected to Kings. For the emergence of a wheel-turning king, cf., also, SĀc 721 and SĀc 722.
n.­504
The following repetition about the north is absent in Ch.
n.­505
Tib. dkor khang; Skt. arthādhikaraṇa (GM asyādhikaraṇasyo…). The meaning of Skt. is unclear to the present translator. Cf. 8.­314, where the word appears as a place where a king sits. Cf., also, examples in Sbhv (SbhvG i 52; ga F.284.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.109a27–28, SbhvG i 172; nga F.83.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.139c24).
n.­506
Tib. ha cang mi dkar ba/ ha cang mi sngo ba/ nya khar ba ltar pags pa ’jam pa (lit., “not excessively white, not excessively blue, the skin is as smooth as the adgura fish”); Skt. nātigaurī nātiśyāmā­madguracchavi (150v8–9, GM: nātigaurī nātiśyāmā madgurucchavir); Ch. bubai buhei buhuang buchi 不白不黒不黄不赤 (“not white, not black, not yellow, not red”). Edgerton interprets madgura as “sallow(-complexioned), unhealthy (in aspect)” (BHSD, q.v.) on the basis of examples from the Lalitavistara (See the Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans., The Play in Full, Toh 95) and Mv, and reads this word in the Bhv “(a -) madguru-cchavir.” The present translation follows this interpretation, which seems to be supported by Ch., too. Cf., also, SbhvG i 104.17–18 (a description of the bodhisattva during ascetic practices). Neither DN 17 nor MN 129 has any word parallel to this.
n.­507
After this there follow in the parallel sūtras the descriptions of the precious householder and minister.
n.­508
Note that here a wish is made in front of Ānanda, not the Buddha, whereas the merit has been generated from an act for the Buddha. This wish turns out to be effective later in the story.
n.­509
Against Tib. and Ch., Skt. lacks “The venerable Ānanda started to eat it. . . . the Blessed One’s teeth.”
n.­510
This is one of the thirty-two marks of a great man. Cf. AKUp 3024 (Honjō 2014, i 318). Cf., also, SbhvG i 51; ga F.283.b, and Mvy 245.
n.­511
Although this is not the Buddha’s utterance but that of an anonymous crowd of people, the Buddha’s expression of direct address, kun dga’ bo (“Ānanda”), has been inserted in error here.
n.­512
Tib. and Ch. repeat “The brahmin king … Vairambhya” in the previous sentence. Skt. does not repeat this.
n.­513
Tib. ’bras s’a lu sog ma’i sbu bur smin pa (“rice ripened in the hollow stems of straw (?)”); Skt. parṇopagūḍhasya śāleḥ. The present translation is based on Skt. due to the difficulty in understanding Tib. Cf. SbhvG ii 88.
n.­514
Skt. and Ch. lack this sentence.
n.­515
Ch. lacks the following few sentences, “Thereupon the Blessed One, … he went to the residence of Agnidatta, the brahmin king.”
n.­516
The following conversation “O Blessed One, what a fault!…” “Great King, … only increase” seems to be a kind of stock passage; cf. Divy 617.17–618.2.
n.­517
“Makes a vow” is absent in Skt. and Ch.
n.­518
The present translator is not sure about the sense of this sentence.
n.­519
For this type of monk appearing in the Vinaya, see n.­309.
n.­520
Since only a single monk is said to have trampled on food in this story, this sentence, giving “monks” in the plural (both in Tib. and Skt.), does not make good sense.
n.­521
Skt. and Ch. abbreviate the main content of this section, referring to “the Vairambhya­sūtra in the chapter of the fours (catuṣkanipāta) in the Ekottarikāgama” and “the fourth chapter (第四品) of the Ekottarikāgama (増一阿笈摩),” respectively. The abbreviated part, the Buddha’s teaching to the monks, corresponds to AN 4.51; however, AN 4.51 does not include the conversation about whether the hut should be broken or not and has a different location for the narrative. In contrast, AKUp 4010 corresponds to this entire section (Honjō 2014, ii 524–26). Although the AKUp does not mention any sūtra title, it is likely to be quoting a sūtra, not the vinaya, since the relevant part of the AKBh on which the AKUp comments states “said in the sūtra,” quoting a few lines. Waldschmidt, basing himself on the place name Vairambhya, assumes AN 8.11 and MĀc 157 to be parallels to the sūtra abbreviated here, but this has to be rejected on the basis of Tib. (Waldschmidt 1980, 141–42; Schopen 2000, 94, 136n16). For the connections between these sūtras and the story of the Buddha’s eating horse-fodder barley, see n.­496.
n.­522
GM lacks the phrase “we will break the huts,” which is actually in the ms: vikopayāma kuṭikā iti (153r9). After this, Skt. and Ch. abbreviate the following part. See the preceding note. What is said by the monks in this passage seems to represent an understanding that huts for the rainy-season retreat are to be scrapped at the end of the retreat because they are no longer needed by monks who wander from place to place except for the duration of the retreat.
n.­523
This sentence is quoted in the AKBh (197.23–198.1), on which AKUp 4010 is the commentary.
n.­524
This story is narrated again later in the Bhv, in the “Tathāgata chapter” in the Anavatapta­gāthā section (f. A Brahmin Who Falsely Accused a Buddha).
n.­525
This section corresponds to SĀc 1174, SN 35.200, and EĀc 43.3 (cf. Yao 2011, 3.2.28). SĀc 1174 consists only of the conversation between the Buddha and a monk and the story of Nanda’s going forth, with neither the episode of the frog nor that of Nanda’s cry of fear. The SN and EĀc versions are more concise. Due to the lack of any other evidence, it is not particularly clear which part of this section belongs to “a sūtra.” For a Gāndhārī parallel, see Glass 2007, 14; for parallels to stock passages, see Chung 2008, 82. For the reference to the story in the Vyākhyāyukti, see Skilling 2000, 346.
n.­526
The text repeats the previous phrase as “alone, … toward myself.”
n.­527
For a similar passage, see 2.­212–2.­215.
n.­528
Cf. Mvy 9136–40, 9143–44.
n.­529
Nanda is said to lean on a stick in SĀc 1174 and EĀc 43.3, while there is no stick in SN 35.200. However, the frog that is squashed by the stick is mentioned only in the Bhv.
n.­530
Ms marmasu; GM carmasu.
n.­531
Tib. could be translated “I’m afraid!” The present translation follows Skt., which uses the noun bhaya (“fear”).
n.­532
Skt. and Ch. have “fear of illness” after “fear of old age.”
n.­533
Ms paśupālakā; GM aśvapālakās.
n.­534
Ch. “knowing that it had been a long time” against Tib. and Skt. (ms athāyuṣmāṃ cchāriputro <’>cira­prakrāntaṃ nandaṃ gopālakaṃ viditvā; GM athāyuṣmān śāri­putraḥ cira­prakrāntaṃ…).
n.­535
Here ends the correspondence to SĀc 1174 and SN 35.200.
n.­536
For this stock passage, cf. 3.­225–3.­227.
n.­537
Here Tib. is slightly confused regarding the location of the abbreviation of the stock phrase. See n.­536.
n.­538
This statement is absent in Ch.
n.­539
“Him,” in the singular (Skt.; Tib.), most probably indicates Nanda, while his attendants and the frog might be included in the abbreviated stock passage.
n.­540
Ch. gives the verse in full, whereas it does not include the preceding stock phrase in prose.
n.­541
Tib. rigs pa dang grol ba’i spobs ba can; Skt. yukta­mukta­pratibhāna. Hiraoka has noted that this term refers to one of the four rhetorical abilities (pratisaṃvid), based on the Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya and the Artha­viniścaya­sūtra (see Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. Distinctly Ascertaining the Meanings, Toh 317) and their commentaries (Hiraoka 2007, ii 24n2). The present translation follows this understanding.
n.­542
For the following story, see Schopen [1999] 2005a, 99n32. Cf., also, Schopen [2008] 2014, 36, 45n30.
n.­543
Skt. lacks the following statement: “O Honored One, what the Blessed One has … the fruit of stream-entry.” Ch. lacks the entire speech of the gods.
n.­544
Skt. pūrva­karmāparādhena. BHSD apabādha is a ghost word based on GM pūrva­karmāpabādhena.
n.­545
The following verses of the Buddha, the hungry ghosts, and the god are absent in Ch.
n.­546
Skt. “Satisfying … cities, rice of the field, kumuda, utpala, and people of Magadha” (… kedāraśāli­kumudotpala­māgadhāni; GM - kumudotpala­paṅkajāni).
n.­547
Tib. maud gal gyi bu chen po seems to be a mistake for maud gal gyi bu (without chen po). Cf. Skt. maudgalyāyana.
n.­548
Skt. saṃtarpaya (“satisfy”).
n.­549
Skt: “…The hungry ghosts were unable to expand their mouths because their mouths were as small as pinholes.”
n.­550
Skt. chandakabhikṣaṇaṃ kṛtvā (“having begged for a free-will offering”); see BHSD s.v. chandaka.
n.­551
Skt. chandayācaka.
n.­552
This story, narrating a king’s encounter with an old man, a sick man, and a dead man, resembles a part of the Buddha’s biography. Cf. SbhvG ii 65–71; ga F.291.b–nga F.5.a.
n.­553
Tib. lto ri sul ltar ’dug pa; “his belly was just like a mountain” in Skt. and Ch.: parvatopamakukṣin, fuzhang ru shan 腹脹如山.
n.­554
Tib. yan lag dang nying lag rnams las ’dzag pa; Skt. aṃga­pratyaṃgāvaghāribhiḥ (GM aṅga­pratyaṅgāvadhāribhiḥ); Ch. zhijie fenli 支節分離 (“limbs and joints were dismembered”). The meaning of Skt. avaghārin (?) is unclear to the present translator. BHSD’s entry “avadhārin ?” refers to this sentence in the Bhv. The present translator has not been able to make sense either of Ch. zhijie fenli 支節分離. This phrase is found in Chinese translations of several texts as a description of a dead body being eaten by animals: e.g., Taishō no. 221, 8.126c5; Taishō no. 1545, 27.839c1; Taishō no. 1579, 30.452b11.
n.­555
Other versions give a different order for the ways in which the deceased is addressed: Skt. son, brother, father, husband; Ch. father, brother, master.
n.­556
Tib. mya ngan gyi khang pa; Skt. śokāgāra; Ch. youjingchu 幽靜處 (“secluded place”).
n.­557
There is another story in the Bhv where a brahmin named Velāma appears (3. Velāma).
n.­558
Skt. arthādhikaraṇa. For this word, see n.­505.
n.­559
Regarding this etymology of Anavatapta in the Bhv, Daniel Ingalls pointed out an entirely different etymology of the name Anotatta in a Pāli commentary (Ingalls 1951, 186). He also noted that the name Ācāmanadī was assumed to originate in *Cāmannadī, a Prākṛt form of Carmaṇvatī, the name of a river that arose from a heap of skins on the occasion when King Rantideva performed a great sacrifice in the Mahābhārata. According to Ingalls, the Buddhist storyteller of King Piṇḍavaṃśa’s tale created the story from the famous story of King Rantideva, using the character of the brahmin Velāma, who was well known for his lavish donations, and changing an animal sacrifice into an offering of water used for boiling rice. Ingalls also inferred this storyteller’s ignorance about Sanskrit from the etymology mentioned above and the existence of “an ancient non-Sanskrit, non Pāli-source” preceding the MSV.
n.­560
Ch. lacks this summary of contents.
n.­561
In the text, a story about “rice soup” is followed by a story of five hundred peasants, but the latter is not mentioned in the summaries of contents in either Skt. or Tib. Further, there is an episode located in Toyikā before the scene moves to “Śrāvastī.” Although the summary of contents in Skt. gives the entry “Toyikā” before “Śrāvastī,” Tib. lacks the former.
n.­562
Upoṣadha is the father of King Māndhātṛ, whose story is narrated later in the Bhv (Chapter Nine, VIII. Sāketā).
n.­563
The name Kumāravardhana is a compound consisting of kumāra (“prince”) and vardhana (“growth”). It seems that this and the next episode have been conflated here in Ch.: “Then the Blessed One arrived at the city of Kumāravardhana (tongchang 童長) and said to the venerable Ānanda, ‘Once a king was born and grew up in this city. His name was Upoṣadha. Therefore this city was named Krauñcāna (xiangsheng 象聲).’ ”
n.­564
This place name appears in different genders in the Sanskrit manuscript: krauñcanām (in the summary of contents; f. acc. sg., but nom. sg. is expected); krauñcanām (f. acc. sg.); krauñcāne (m. or n. loc. sg.); krauñcāna krauñcāna iti (krauñcāna < ḥ > krauñcāna iti [m. nom. sg.] or krauñcāna < ṃ > krauñcāna < ṃ > iti [n. nom. sg.]). Probably the two examples of krauñcanām are misspellings for krauñcānam (n. nom. sg. and n. acc. sg.) since the locative example, asminn ānanda krauñcāne, is clearly masculine or neuter and could hardly be a misspelling for the feminine: *asyām ānanda krauñcanāyām.
n.­565
For this abbreviation, see II. Middle Village.
n.­566
The word mchod sbyin (Tib.) or yajña (Skt.) seems not to mean any sacrificial worship, which is the common meaning of the word, but just “giving,” as also in the story of King Piṇḍavaṃśa (8.­317), hence the present translation.
n.­567
The episode of Sālabalā is absent in the Degé edition, probably as a result of confusion of the two episodes of Sālabalā and Sālibalā. In contrast, Ch. gives only Sālabalā, suoluolishu 娑羅力樹, and lacks Sālibalā. Skt. gives both.
n.­568
The story of King Māndhātṛ in this section, VIII. Sāketā, partially corresponds to the Māndhātṛsūtra narrated in the Buddha’s sermon to King Prasenajit later in the Bhv (9.­138 ff.) with many differences. See the notes there for parallels and comparisons.
n.­569
This place name appears in different genders in the Sanskrit manuscript: sāto (sā<ke>to?: m. nom. sg.) in the summary of contents; sāketam (once as m./n. acc., twice as n. nom. sg.); sāketāyām (twice as f. loc. sg.). The present translation uses Sāketā for convenience. Note, however, that this place name is generally neuter, as Edgerton points out (BHSD s.v. Sāketā), and that Divy 17, parallel to the Māndhātṛsūtra narrated in the Buddha’s sermon to King Prasenajit later in the Bhv (9.­138 ff.), gives the name in the neuter: sāketasāketam. GM harmonizes all occurrences of the name as feminine.
n.­570
For this stock phrase, see 2.­103. The Māndhātṛsūtra narrated in the Buddha’s sermon to King Prasenajit later in the Bhv (9.­138 ff.) gives the phrase in full.
n.­571
GM mūrdhāta (so in Divy 17). This sentence becomes simpler in Tib. and Ch.‍—“He was named ‘Born from the Crown of the Head (spyi bo skyes, dingsheng 頂生)’ ”‍—probably because the etymology of the name was adequately represented in the translations of the name. The present translation is based on Skt. for this sentence.
n.­572
The Māndhātṛsūtra narrated in the Buddha’s sermon to King Prasenajit later in the Bhv (9.­138 ff.) and Divy 17 mān dhaya; SbhvG i 16 mān dhāpaya.
n.­573
GBhv 159r7 mūrdhnāna; GM mūrdhāta.
n.­574
Only Ch. has a summary of contents just before this section: “The cause of the well of gruel and golden barley, of peasants and oxen, of a leprous woman’s water used for washing rice, of King Prasenajit, of a poor woman’s lamp, and of King Māndhātṛ.”The series of stories from Rice Soup to C. Toyikā corresponds to Divy 31. According to Hiraoka, Sudhana­kumārāvadānam, the title given at the end of Divy 31, is incorrect and should be corrected to Pañca­kārṣaka­śatāvadānam (Hiraoka 2007, ii 275n56). A story somewhat similar to the story of Rice Soup is found in Merv-av 219.
n.­575
For a similar verse, see the story of Miṇḍhaka in the Bhv (10.­139). See also Merv-av, 272n531.
n.­576
Skt. adhiṣṭhāyaka (GM adhiṣṭhāyika). BHSD adhiṣṭhāyika is based on this passage.
n.­577
Section label 9.a.1 in BhvY (p. 286ff.). This section does not appear in the summary of contents in Skt. and Tib. (9.­1), but is mentioned there in Ch.
n.­578
The stock phrase “ornamented with a fathom-wide halo … a thousand suns” is abbreviated in GBhv. NBhv and Ch. seem to be the same as GBhv in this regard.
n.­581
Section label 9.a.2 in BhvY (p. 287ff.). This section does not appear in the summary of contents (9.­1).
n.­582
The rebirth of the oxen as gods is abbreviated at the end of the preceding section, with reference to the story of haṃsas, fish, and turtles.
n.­583
On this term (Skt. vihārasvāmin), see Schopen [1996] 2004a.
n.­584
Section label 9.b in BhvY (p. 288ff.). This section is not referred to in the summary of contents (9.­1) and corresponds to the second half of Divy 6 and the second half of Divy 31 (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 154–59, 419–20). The parallel in Divy 6 seems to have been caused erroneously (Hiraoka 2007, i 160). André Bareau has summarized parallel stories of the stūpa of the Buddha Kāśyapa in the Sifen lü (Dharmaguptaka Vinaya), Wufen lü (Mahīśāsaka Vinaya), Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya, Binaiye, and the Kṣv (1962, 257ff.). Takushū Sugimoto has also listed the first three of these stories and the story of Toyikā in the Bhv along with other materials, including the DhpA, and has pointed out reports about the Buddha Kāśyapa’s stūpa made by Faxian and Xuanzang (Gaoseng Faxian zhuan 高僧法顕伝, Taishō no. 2085, 51.861a; Datang xiyuji 大唐西域記, Taishō no. 2087, 51.900c; Sugimoto 1978). Whereas Bareau considered the stories in the Sifen lü, Wufen lü, and Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya to originate from an old common source, Gregory Schopen proposed the opposite view, introducing the stories in the Bhv and Divy ([1985] 1997, 28–29). Schopen regarded this version in the Bhv and Divy as an old account preceding the other parallel stories, based on his observations that the version does not have the subplots found in the other versions and knows nothing about a stūpa at Toyikā, only about relics.
n.­585
Tib., Ch., and NBhv abbreviate this stock phrase, whereas GBhv does not abbreviate it.
n.­586
The same phrase, parihānir √bhū-, is used in Skt. for both the words “work” and “merit,” whereas Tib. uses two different phrases: bdag gi las ’chor la and bsod nams yongs su nyams par ’gyur na.
n.­587
Gregory Schopen has pointed out that this story implies that a living buddha and a collection of relics were considered to be equivalent as objects of worship (Schopen [1987] 1997, 131–32). Referring to Schopen’s remark, Satoshi Hiraoka has contrasted the functions of stūpas as a living buddha in the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya with the idea in the AKBh that there is no actual recipient of the donations to a stūpa (Hiraoka 2002a).
n.­588
GBhv lacks “It naturally occurs … thoughts?” probably as the result of confusion of the two occurrences of the phrase bhagavatā laukikaṃ cittam utpāditaṃ (“the Blessed One entertained mundane thoughts”/“[for the sake of what] did the Blessed One entertain mundane thoughts?”). NBhv, Tib., and Ch. all agree, giving this stock phrase correctly.
n.­589
Cf. the scene of the appearance of King Praṇāda’s pillar, 3.­143.
n.­590
Here the name Virūḍhaka is translated lus ’phags po, unlike most of the other occurrences of this name in the Bhv. See n.­329.
n.­591
Although Tib. explicitly connects the word “bricklayer” only to Purāṇa (drang srong sbyin dang so phag mkhan rnying pa dag), the Sanskrit word sthapati, “bricklayer,” seems rather to qualify both Ṛṣidatta and Purāṇa: ṛṣi­datta­purāṇa­sthapatī (GM uṣidattaḥ purāṇa­sthapatir). The word sthapati can mean various professions, and some texts describe these two people as ministers (cf. Kṣv: tha F.85.b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.238b), although the present translation follows Tib. and Ch., both of which translate the word as “bricklayer”: so phag mkhan, zhuanshi 磚師. See DPPN “2 Isidatta” and “2 Purāṇa.”
n.­592
Tib. mchod rten; Skt. caitya. The word mchod rten is usually a translation of another Skt. word, stūpa.
n.­593
For parallels to this and the next verse, see Melzer 2010b, esp. 67–68. Cf., also, Vvbh: Taishō no. 1442, 23.682a; ca F.206.b.
n.­594
Ch. abbreviates the following passage as follows: “Then some people came with pure thoughts, bringing garlands of flowers, lamps, banners, flags, and parasols, and offered them. The Buddha knew their thoughts and spoke a verse for each.” NBhv agrees with GBhv and Tib. against Ch. in this regard.
n.­595
Tib. ’dzam bu’i chu bo’i gser srang bye ba; Skt. śataṃ sahasrāṇi suvarṇa­koṭyo jāmbū­nadā (GM suvarṇavāhā) (“a hundred thousand koṭī (ten million) [pieces] of gold from the Jambū River”). The present translation follows Tib.
n.­596
This sentence is a verse in Skt. and Ch.
n.­597
For the following stock passage, cf. 2.­315.
n.­598
Section number 9.10.1 in BhvY (p. 292ff.). The series of stories from here to D. The Offering of a Lamp by a Beggar Woman corresponds to Divy 7 Nagarāvarambikāvadāna (English trsl., Rotman 2008–17, i 161–75, 420–22). Cf. TheraG 1054–56. Cf., also, BAK 17 Ādarśa­mukhāvadāna (Straube 2009, 108–21, 254–59), which summarizes the series of stories from this section to F. 8. Ādarśamukha in the Bhv. There is another parallel in the Gilgit manuscripts (Hinüber 2014, 97).
n.­599
In Divy 7, the following conversation is placed between the householder’s coming home and his preparation of the meal.
n.­600
Tib. grong phyi nyug ma; Skt. nagarāvalambikā; Ch. qi’er 乞兒. Edgerton interprets the word nagarāvalambaka/-ikā to indicate a washerman/-woman, based on an example in the Mv in which he understands that a nagarāvalambikā is “a woman whose job it was to hang out clothes (to dry?)” (BHSD, q.v.). Rotman translates this word in another way: “a woman dependent on a city for alms,” and he makes its meaning clearer in his subheading: “The Venerable Mahākāśyapa and a Leprous Beggar Woman” (2008–17, i 162–63). He notes that the term seems to be the converse of gocaragrāma (“sustenance village, a village where food is supplied to monks,” BHSD, s.v. gocara), without mentioning the entry for nagarāvalambaka/ikā in BHSD. The present translator agrees with Rotman’s translation for the following reasons. First, both Tib. and Ch. translate the word as “beggar” in this story in the Bhv. Second, there is no mention of washing in the story, but the nagarāvalambikā is said to obtain water used for boiling rice “by begging.” (This water, Skt. ācāma, seems to be something usually not to be drunk but to be thrown out after cooking. Cf. the final part of Chapter Eight, IX. Velāma. Cf., also, CPD s.v. ācāma.). Third, what a nagarāvalambikā does in Edgerton’s example in the Mv is to hang a hempen rag on the branch of a tree in order to offer it to the bodhisattva, and so one can hardly assume that “to hang out clothes” was her job, as Edgerton says. Although J. J. Jones employed Edgerton’s interpretation in his translation of the Mv, he makes this remark: “the robe [offered to the bodhisattva] needed washing!” (1949–56, iii 299n2).
n.­601
Skt. tasarikāṃ kartum ārabdhā; Tib. ras skud ’ju bar brtsams so (lit., “began to seize cotton cloth”). The present translation is based on Skt. Cf. BHSD tasarikā.
n.­602
Skt. and Tib. give Mahākāśyapa’s thought in verse here, but Ch. translates it as prose. It is not very clear in D that these words constitute a verse. S ’di zas lha yi bdud rtsi la // khyim gyi sbungs ni ’di tsam pas // shin tu ’gal lo zhes bsams te // bdag gi snying la the tshom skyes //; D ’di’i zas lha’i bdud rtsi la khyim gyi sbungs ni ’di tsam pas shin tu ’gal lo zhes bsams te / bdag gi snying la the tshom skyes pa.
n.­603
Tib. lhung bzed kyi kha g.yogs; Skt. piṇḍopadhāna; Ch. bogai 鉢蓋. Cf. Mvy 8960, BHSD q.v. Hiraoka has suggested that this passage might be a reflection of a formal act of turning a bowl upside down, i.e., not receiving almsfood, which was performed by the order as punishment to a lay person (Hiraoka 2007, i 189n32). However, there is no mention of a cover for a bowl in the explanation of this formal act in the Kṣv (D tha F.37.b–39.a; Taishō no. 1451, 24.220a–c). This utensil is referred to in another passage in the Kṣv (D da F.279.b–280.b; Taishō 24.372c. Ch. bolao 鉢絡, bodai 鉢袋), where the Buddha authorizes nuns to have covers for bowls. In the latter episode, the event that leads to the authorization is that almsfood obtained by Mahāprajāpatī causes a brahmin jealousy. There a cover for a bowl is described as a bag made of cloth, to which Yijing adds detailed comments about how to make and use it. Cf., also, Yijing’s explanation in his travel record: Taishō no. 2125, 54.207c–208a, 215b.
n.­604
Section number 9.10.2 in BhvY (p. 296ff.). For parallels, see n.­598.
n.­605
Section number 9.10.3 in BhvY (p. 297ff.). For parallels, see n.­598.
n.­606
A stock passage about the birth of a child to a householder. For parallels, see Hiraoka 2002b, 164.
n.­607
Skt. and Ch. lack the sentences “The child saw …  ‘Why, mother?’ ” They are given in Tib. and Divy 7.
n.­608
A stock passage about self-awakened ones. For parallels, see Hiraoka 2002b, 167.
n.­609
The word “bedding and seats” is missing in Tib., whereas Skt. gives it.
n.­610
Section number 9.10.4 in BhvY (p. 299ff.). For parallels, see n.­598. Cf., also, Xian’yu jing 賢愚経 (Taishō no. 202, 4.370c–371c).
n.­611
Whereas Tib. lists father, mother, son, and city in this order, Skt. and Ch. give them in the following order: father, mother, city, and son.
n.­612
Skt. lacks “The Blessed One asked … it still was in vain.’ ”
n.­613
Section number 9.10.5 in BhvY (p. 301). A story somewhat similar to this episode, in which the Buddha remonstrates with King Prasenajit for expecting a great result from his offerings, is in EĀc 23.1 (Taishō no. 125, 2.609a ff.). Cf. Anālayo [2014a] 2016b, 392–93.
n.­614
Skt. “It would be nice if the Blessed One would predict my supreme and complete awakening, too. When will I become the best in the world, the leader?”
n.­615
The Skt. word kalyāṇamitrāni, which is translated “good friends” in the present translation, refers to spiritual friends who give reliable instruction along the path, including buddhas.
n.­616
In a story in the Ekottarikāgama translated into Chinese, the Buddha warns King Prasenajit not to be content with his donations, although there is no mention of the awakening of a buddha (EĀc 23.1). See Anālayo 2016b, 392–93.
n.­617
For the arrangement of the following stories of the Buddha’s former lives, see Yao forthcoming b.
n.­618
Section number 9.10.6 in BhvY (p. 301ff.).
n.­619
The following verse appears only in Tib. Although it is titled bar sdom (*antaroddāna), the word so far translated as “a section index” in the present translation, it constitutes one of the three lists of stories of the Buddha’s former lives narrated to King Prasenajit, the others of which appear as sdom (*uddāna, 9.­939; H. Former Life Stories III). These three lists are subordinate to the ninth summary of contents, and so the present translator refers to them as “internal summaries of contents.”
n.­620
Section number 9.10.6.1 in BhvY (p. 302ff.). Cf. VIII. Sāketā in this chapter. This section was translated from Tib. by Schiefner (tr. by Ralston, 1882, chap. I). Although the story is referred to as “the Māndhātṛsūtra in the Section Connected to Kings in the Madhyamāgama” in Skt. and Ch., which abbreviate the story after the first few lines, it is not entirely clear which part of the story in the Bhv corresponds to the sūtra. The story has parallels in MĀc 60 Sizhou jing 四洲経, Divy 17 Māndhātāvadāna (English trsl. Rotman 2008–17, i 336–71, 438–43), and the Māndhātāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts (MdhA; see Matsumura 1980, 163–97, 348–54). For further parallels, see Hiraoka 2007, i 398; Wille 2014a, 197. For Māndhātṛ’s story in art, see Zin 2012.
n.­621
Section number 9.10.6.1.1 in BhvY (p. 302ff.).
n.­622
In Divy 17, the Buddha addresses not King Prasenajit but Ānanda, to whom he narrates the story.
n.­623
The number is sixty thousand in VIII. Sāketā.
n.­624
Here Skt. and Ch. give the following reference: vistareṇa māndhātrisūtraṃ madhyamāgame rāja­saṃyukta­kanipāte (166r7) (“As explained in detail in the Sūtra of Māndhātṛ in the Section Connected to Kings in the Madhyamāgama”); 如中阿笈摩王法相應品中廣説 (“As explained in detail in the Section Connected to Kings in the Madhyamāgama”). These two versions abbreviate some parts of the story and differ somewhat from Tib. in the order of episodes, whereas Divy 17 agrees with Tib. in this regard. See the following notes.
n.­625
In Buddhist narratives, Indra (Śakra) is known to be mortal despite his very long life, and when one Indra has died, another Indra is supposed to be born. Our story informs readers at the end how long a Śakra’s lifespan is.
n.­626
Tib. drang srong mngon par shes pa lnga dang ldan pa lnga brgya; Skt. Durmukho nāma ṛṣiḥ pañcābhijñaḥ (“a ṛṣi named Durmukha, who had the five kinds of supernormal knowledge”); Ch. 五仙人名曰醜面 (“five ṛṣis named ‘Ugly Face’ (Durmukha)” (so reads the second Goryeo edition; however, 五仙人 might be a misprint for 五通仙人, “a ṛṣi having the five kinds of supernormal knowledge”); Divy 17 pañca­ṛṣi­śatāni pañcābhi­jñāni. Divy 17 agrees with Tib.
n.­627
Skt. and Ch. lack the following passages down to and including the episode of a rain of jewels (9.­171).
n.­628
Cf. SbhvG i 16.11–12.
n.­629
After this, Tib. and Divy 17 correspond to each other, whereas Skt. and Ch. only state “Thus six successive Śakras died while he was ruling over Godānīya in the west; six [died while he was ruling] over Videha in the east; and six [died while he was ruling] over Kuru in the north.” The order of the continents is east, west, north in Tib., and west, east, north in Skt. and Ch.
n.­630
The order of the following episodes of mystic rice and trees is reversed in Divy 17. MdhA agrees with the Bhv in this regard.
n.­631
This mystic food appears in the story of the first humans on earth in the Sbhv (SbhvG i 10.24–25). Cf., also, Mvy 5310.
n.­632
The following passage about traveling through seven mythological mountains to the realm of the Thirty-Three Gods is simpler in Skt.: “While he was staying on Mount Nimindhara, six [successive Śakras died]. Thus it was on Vinataka, Aśvakarṇa, Sudarśana, Khadiraka, Īṣādhāra, Yugandhara,” with the section index the same as in Tib. at 9.­196. Ch. is even simpler and lacks the section index.
n.­633
Skt., Tib., and Ch. mostly agree in the following passage about the hindrance caused by the ṛṣis.
n.­634
Skt. and Ch. make the yakṣa Divaukasa, instead of the most treasured minister, say the following words. Divy 17 agrees with Tib.
n.­635
Tib. ’di ni kun la ’grub pa yin (“This is completed in everything”); Skt. naitat sarvatra sidhyati. The present translation adds the negation to Tib., following Skt.
n.­636
In the following passage, Skt. and Ch. give two nāga kings, Nanda and Upananda, instead of the four kinds of guards of the Thirty-Three Gods to which Tib., Divy 17, and MdhA refer.
n.­637
This description of Mount Sumeru tallies with an explanation in the AKBh (159–60).
n.­638
Although Tib. here calls this kind of living being nod sbyin (Skt. yakṣa), Divy 17 refers to them as devāḥ (“gods”). Divy 17 also refers to mālādhāras and sadāmattas as gods, unlike Tib. A passage in the AKBh about these beings living on the terraces of Mount Sumeru agrees with Tib. against Divy 17 in referring to karoṭapāṇis as yakṣas and not identifying mālādhāras and sadāmattas as gods (AKBh 167.4–8). However, in the following passage Tib. adds the word lha (“god”) to the names of these three beings. The present translation follows Tib. with its inconsistency in this regard.
n.­639
The following description of the summit of Mount Sumeru, the city of the gods, and so on is absent in Skt. and Ch.; Tib., Divy 17, and MdhA mostly agree with one another.
n.­640
There is a sūtra mainly concerned with this mystic tree: MĀc 2 Zhoudushu jing 晝度樹經. Various texts refer to this tree with different names: pāriyātra/-ka, pārijāta/-ka (Pāli pāricchattaka) (Matsumura 1980, 341–43). The present translation follows MdhA, which gives pāriyātrako here.
n.­641
The following description of the city of Sudarśana also tallies with that in the AKBh (167–68).
n.­642
Although the text says that the meeting hall is “three hundred yojanas in length and width,” this three hundred yojanas should be understood to be the diameter of a circle, not the side of a square. The circumference of a circle is calculated as three times the diameter in the AKBh (158.18–20). Cf. Lishi apitan lun 立世阿毘曇論: 忉利諸天有善法堂。逕三十由旬・周迴九十由旬: “The gods of Trāyastriṃśa (the Thirty-Three Gods) have a hall of the good law (Sudharmā). It is thirty yojanas in diameter, ninety yojanas in circumference.” (Taishō no. 1644, 32.183.b3–4) Later, Zhangsuozhi lun 彰所知論 in the thirteenth century clearly states that the hall Sudharmā is round (圓相) (Taishō no. 1645, 32.228a12–13).
n.­643
Instead of describing in full how Śakra invited the king as in Tib., Skt. and Ch. state only as follows: “Śakra, Lord of the Gods, invited him to half of his seat.” Cf. the story of King Nimi in the Bhv, where Śakra voluntarily offers half of his seat to the king: 4.­58.
n.­644
The description of the battle in the following passages is somewhat simpler in Skt. and Ch. than in Tib.
n.­645
“Five barriers” indicates the five kinds of guards of the Thirty-Three Gods mentioned above, namely, nāgas, karoṭapāṇis, mālādhāras, sadāmattas, and the Four Great Kings. However, this reference does not make good sense in Skt. and Ch. since the five kinds of guards do not appear in the earlier part of the story in these versions (see n.­636).
n.­646
Skt. and Ch. give the king’s verses immediately after this, without the conversation between the king and his ministers, etc.
n.­647
For this list of people, cf. the story of Mahāgovinda in the Bhv (9.­1289), where the text refers to blon po’i tshogs rnams (“the group of ministers”: *amātyagaṇa, as given in Divy 17) instead of blon po dang rtsis pa (“ministers and astrologers”).
n.­648
Tib. sna chen po la gtogs pa; Skt. *mahāmātra (as given in MdhA; cf. GM 282.2, ga F.46.b.7). Divy 17 gives mahāmātyā[ḥ] for this term.
n.­649
The following four verses correspond to Uv ii 17–20. The third one appears also in SĀc 1098 and 1099.
n.­650
This sentence is absent in Skt., Ch., and Divy 17.
n.­651
This sentence and the following verses are absent in Divy 17, whereas all three versions of the Bhv have them.
n.­652
Skt. alpakaṃ jīvitaṃ jñātvā sukṛcchraṃ sāṃparāyikam (“Knowing that life is short, painful, and miserable”).
n.­653
Skt. kṛtapuṇyā (“having made merits”). The following passage, “At that time citizens … and experienced unbearable mortal pain,” is absent in Skt. and Ch., whereas Divy 17 corresponds to Tib.
n.­654
P brgya rtsa bcu bzhi (ga F.169.a.5); D, S brgyad bcu rtsa bzhi. Cf. Divy 17 and MdhA catur­daśottaraṃ śakra­śatam (“one hundred fourteen Śakras”). Ch. does not mention the number of Śakras.
n.­655
Tib. lo bye ba phrag gsum dang drug khri (“thirty million and sixty thousand years”). This number contradicts the calculation suggested by the text (100 × 30 × 12 × 1,000 = 36,000,000). Divy 17 tisro varṣa­lakṣāḥ ṣaṣṭiś ca varṣa­sahasrāṇi (“three hundred and sixty thousand years”: cf. Hiraoka 2007, i 421n219, 220; Rotman 2008–17, i 443n746); MdhA tisro varṣa­koṭyaḥ ṣaṣṭiṃ ca varṣa[śata­sahasrāṇi] (emended by Matsumura with square brackets). The length of a day of the Thirty-Three Gods, a hundred human years, and the lifespan of the Thirty-Three Gods, or a thousand divine years, are mentioned in the AKBh (173.18–19).
n.­656
Section number 9.10.6.1.2 in BhvY (p. 317ff.). The following two stories of the former lives of King Māndhātṛ appear in Tib., Divy 17, and MdhA, whereas Skt. and Ch. lack them.
n.­657
Note that the rain that fell in the king’s palace was “of jewels” in the prose part and “of kārṣāpaṇa (coins)” in a verse in the story of Māndhātṛ.
n.­658
Tib. rang gi khyim du chas so, Divy śvaśura­gṛham anuprasthitaḥ (svasura - MSS) (“He departed for the house of his father-in-law”). Rotman’s translation follows the reading of the Divy (p. 368), whereas Hiraoka (i, 421n228) emends śvaśuragṛham to svagṛham (“to his own house”) on the basis of Tib. of the Bhv and the Foshuo dingshengwang yinyuan jing 佛説頂生王因縁經 (Taishō no. 165, 3.406a13).
n.­659
Note that the protagonist scattered “flowers made of four kinds of jewels” in the preceding prose.
n.­660
For the city Kuśāvatī, see 2. Mahāsudarśana and 9.­396 in a. The Story of Prince Kuśa.
n.­661
Section number 9.10.6.1.3 in BhvY (p. 308).
n.­662
Section number 9.10.6.2 in BhvY (p. 318ff.). The following story corresponds to the Mahā­sudarśanāvadāna from Gilgit (ms no. 1550–67, hereafter MSA), the first half of the story of Mahāsudarśana in the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra, and its parallel in the Kṣv (D da F.266.a–274.b; Taishō no.1451, 24.393a–394.b; see also Matsumura 1988b, 3–29 and 86–128), the first half of MĀc 68 Dashanjianwang jing 大善見王経 (Taishō no. 26, 1.515b–516c), a part of DN 17 Mahā­sudassana­suttanta (ii 169–85), and so on. Cf., also, the story of King Mahāsudarśana and his son in the Bhv (D. A Story of a Former Life of the Buddha: King Mahāsudarśana).
n.­663
Here Skt. and Ch. abbreviate the story, referring to the Mahā­sudarśana­sūtra in the Section of Six Sūtras in the Dīrghāgama: vistareṇa mahā­sudarśana­sūtraṃ dīrghāgame ṣaṭsūtrikanipāte (167r5–6, Matsumura 1988b, 131); 於長阿笈摩六十三品中已廣分別説 (lit., “it has been explained in the Section of Sixty-Three in the Dīrghāgama”; cf. Liu 2010, 14n2). This title, Mahā­sudarśana­sūtra, is not seen in the table of sūtras in the Dīrghāgama of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins restored by Jens-Uwe Hartmann (2004), and probably the reference in Skt. and Ch. indicates not an independent sūtra but the story of Mahāsudarśana in the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra in the Section of Six Sūtras in the Dīrghāgama, given the inclusion of this story in most of the extant versions of the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra.
n.­664
For a similar expression, see 7.­108.
n.­665
Here Tib. seems to be somewhat confused: “leaves, flowers, and fruits of the gold palm trees were made of silver; those of the silver palm trees were made of gold; those of the gold palm trees were made of lapis lazuli; those of the lapis lazuli palm trees were made of crystal.” The present translation follows Kṣv Tib., MPS, and MSA.
n.­666
Here the text refers to rin po che (“jewel”) instead of bai dUr+ya (“lapis lazuli”).
n.­667
From this sentence, all three versions of the Bhv correspond to each other until the end of the story. In other words, Skt. and Ch. abbreviate all the passages about the seven treasures of the king, up to the king’s decision to make donations, referring to the Mahāsudarśana­sūtra (see n.­663). Note the inconsistency in this and the preceding sentences: the king thinks he will make donations to “śramaṇas, brahmins, and people of good conduct”; he does make donations, but to “five hundred self-awakened ones.” The Kṣv, MPS, and MSA do not have this problem, because only “śramaṇas, brahmins, and people of good conduct” are referred to in these texts, not five hundred self-awakened ones. This inconsistency is likely to be the result of the careless combining of two passages from different sources, and probably occurred when the story from the Mahāsudarśana­sūtra was inserted into the Bhv. Versions of Mahāsudarśana’s story other than the Bhv version, namely, MĀc 68, DN 17, and various versions of the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra that include the story in the Kṣv, do not have the following verses but narrate how the king led a religious life in the palace and was reborn in heaven. After this, they have a concluding remark that is different from the Bhv version.
n.­668
Section number 9.10.6.3 in BhvY (p. 323ff.). This story has parallels in MĀc 155 Xudaduo jing 須達哆經, AKUp 3079, Taishō no. 72 Foshuo sangui wujie cixin yanli gongde jing 佛説三歸五戒慈心厭離功徳經, Taishō no. 73 Foshuo xuda jing 佛説須達經, Taishō no. 74 Foshuo zhangzhe shibao jing 佛説長者施報經, EĀc 27.3, and AN 9.20. Cf. Anālayo 2010, 70–71. The story in AKUp 3079 mostly corresponds to MĀc 155, including its introduction, the Buddha’s conversation with the householder Anāthapiṇḍada, which is absent in our Bhv version. Probably the redactors of the Bhv borrowed the story of Velāma from their Velāmasūtra, ignoring its introduction, for the purpose of fitting the story into the framework of the Bhv.
n.­669
Here Skt. and Ch. abbreviate the story, referring to the Velāmasūtra in the Section of Brahmins in the Madhyamāgama: vistareṇa velāmasūtre madhyamāgame brāhmaṇa­nipāte, 於毘羅摩經中説如中阿笈摩經.
n.­670
According to AKBh, there was some discussion among ancient scholars about who the “single ordinary person dwelling in a forest of jambū trees” is in this sentence. After reviewing several different interpretations, Vasubandhu presents his own that this “ordinary person” is the Bodhisattva Sarvārtha­siddha (i.e., Siddhārtha) meditating in the first stage of dhyāna under a jambū tree (AKBh 155.5–16).
n.­671
AKUp 3079 ends here, and the abbreviation in Skt. and Tib. ends here, too. Hereafter the three versions of the Bhv correspond to each other. It is likely that the following verses are not from the Velāmasūtra referred to and are found only in the Bhv. Cf. similar examples in Mahāsudarśana’s story (F. 2. Mahāsudarśana) and Mahādeva’s story (F. 6. Mahādeva).
n.­672
Section number 9.10.6.4 in BhvY (p. 326ff.).
n.­673
Section number 9.10.6.4.1 in BhvY (p. 326ff.). This story was translated from Tib. by Schiefner (tr. by Ralston, 1882, chap. II). The story has parallels in J 531 Kusajātaka, Mv ii 420–96 and iii 1–25, Pusa bensheng manlun 菩薩本生鬘論 (Taishō no. 160, 3.336b–c), Xian’yu jing 賢愚經 14 (Taishō no. 202, 4.364b–365b), and Liudu jijing 六度集經 84 (Taishō no. 152, 3.46b–47b).
n.­674
In Skt. and Ch., this king is referred to as a wheel-turning king who rules over the four continents and has the seven treasures and the four kinds of human success, whereas it is unclear in Tib. whether the king is a wheel-turning king. The king is called Mahāśakuni in the later part of the story.
n.­675
In Ch., Śakra does not appear in this scene, and “a certain person” is said to bring the medicine to the king.
n.­676
Cf. Merv-av, 193 and 205.
n.­677
Ch. 形貌端嚴。面如師子 (“His appearance was handsome, and his face was like a lion’s”). This translation looks strange because it is obvious that the prince’s face is quite the opposite of “handsome” in this story. In the latter part of the story, the qualifier of the prince’s appearance is translated 可畏 (“dreadful”).
n.­678
Skt. “If you take me back, that’s fine.”
n.­679
Hereafter, Skt. and Tib. mostly correspond to each other until the prince is reunited with his wife and returns home with her; Ch. is simpler than the other two and does not have the episodes in which the prince disguises himself as a garland maker, etc.
n.­680
Or Buṭaka (b and v are interchangeable in this Skt. manuscript). GM changes the name into Vṛji, seemingly based on Tib. spong byed.
n.­681
An “army consisting of four divisions” includes an elephant division. Consequently, if there were “such a flood that it carried away the four-division army,” there must remain no animals smaller than elephants, either. Since there are sheep walking nearby, the verse suggests, what the villagers said is a lie.
n.­682
For this term, see n.­48.
n.­683
Section number 9.10.6.4.2 in BhvY (p. 332ff.). This story is narrated only in Skt. and Tib., being absent in Ch.
n.­684
For this stock phrase, see 3.­126.
n.­685
Section number 9.10.6.5 in BhvY (p. 333ff.).
n.­686
Note that the protagonist has not made any donations in this story.
n.­687
Section number 9.10.6.6 in BhvY (p. 334ff.). The stories in this and the next section are partially different from the stories of the kings Mahādeva and Nimi already narrated in the Bhv, Chapter 4, III. Mithilā (for other parallels, see n.­194). The difference between these two sets of stories seems to be mainly due to the editorial transformation of their common source (the Mahādevasūtra in the Madhyamāgama) into stories included in the sermon to King Prasenajit, which we are now reading. The first set of stories seems to preserve the exact contents of the sūtra. For a detailed discussion, see Yao 2007.
n.­688
Skt. and Ch. here abbreviate most of the story, referring to the Mahādevasūtra in the Section Connected to Kings in the Madhyamāgama: vistareṇa mahā­deva­sūtraṃ madhyamāgame rāja­saṃyuktaka­nipāte, 我於中阿笈摩已廣説訖 (“I have already explained this in detail in the Madhyamāgama”).
n.­689
The abbreviation in Skt. and Ch. ends here.
n.­690
Note that there has been no mention of any “offerings” or donations made by King Mahādeva in this story‍—the story has been about the king’s going forth and leading the pure life. As well as this inconsistency, this passage, the sentence and following verses about offerings, has another problem: it is unclear which “Mahādeva” is speaking the verses here‍—the first one, his son, or the eighty-four thousandth Mahādeva. The first option is the most likely, but then it is somewhat strange that the verses appear after the reference to the descendants of the first Mahādeva. This passage appears neither in another story of Mahādeva in the Bhv nor in any of the parallel stories such as MN 83, etc., but connects to the typical concluding passage “Great King, if you think that I attained supreme and complete awakening by these donations…,” which is common to many stories in the Buddha’s sermon to King Prasenajit in the Bhv. Therefore, the most likely explanation of the problems concerning the passage about offerings mentioned above is that it was combined with the text of the Mahādevasūtra at some editorial stage of the Bhv so that the story about Mahādeva’s going forth in the Madhyamāgama was transformed into a story about donations, which would match the context of the sermon to Prasenajit in the Bhv.
n.­691
Section number 9.10.6.7 in BhvY (p. 336ff.). See n.­687.
n.­692
“The last” means “the last in succession after the eighty-four thousand Mahādevas,” referring to the concluding part of the preceding section. Here Skt. and Ch. abbreviate the story, referring to the Nimisūtra in the Section Connected to Kings (in the Madhyamāgama): vistareṇa nimi­sūtraṃ rāja­saṃyuktani­pāte, 我亦先於阿笈摩經中廣説. (“I have explained it before in a sūtra in the Āgama, too”). However, the present translator doubts the existence of an independent sūtra narrating the story of Nimi in the lost Madhyamāgama of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins. Judging from Ch.’s statement about the abbreviation of another set of stories of Mahādeva and Nimi in the Bhv, it is certain that this Madhyamāgama had a sūtra entitled Mahādevasūtra in which the stories of Mahādeva and Nimi were combined, similar to its parallels in the MĀc and MN. Therefore, it is most likely that what is abbreviated here is the second half of the Mahādevasūtra, the first half of which has already appeared in the preceding section. It should be noted, too, that Ch. does not refer to the specific title of a sūtra, either here or in the preceding section, whereas it gives the title “Mahādeva” when it abbreviates the story in its other occurrence in the Bhv (see n.­194).
n.­693
Here ends the abbreviation in Skt. and Ch. The following verse does not appear in the other story of Nimi in the Bhv (4.­48), and is likely to have been combined with the text of the sūtra referred to here in the process of editing the Bhv. See n.­690.
n.­694
The following two verses, which are about Nimi’s decision to refuse Śakra’s offer and make merit, are common to both stories of Nimi in the Bhv (see 4.­61.
n.­695
The following three verses, which are in praise of donations, do not appear in the other story of Nimi in the Bhv (4.­48).
n.­696
Section number 9.10.6.8 in BhvY (p. 339ff.). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, III. Parallel stories: J 257 Gāmaṇicaṇḍajātaka, Xianyu jing 賢愚經 53 (Taishō no. 202, 4.237c ff.); D no. 341 mdzangs blun zhes bya ba’i mdo, chap. 39 (mdo sde A.F.270.b ff.); BAK 17 (including a summary of the preceding part; see Straube 2009, 108–21, 341); and Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā 30 (cf. Panglung 1981, 39). For a Jaina parallel of the story of Daṇḍin, see Wu 2017.
n.­697
Note that this story lacks the stock phrase “Great King, again . . . . Listen to that story,” which appears at the beginning of most stories in this part of the Bhaiṣajyavastu, the Buddha’s sermon to King Prasenajit. The beginning of this story, “After him,” and that of the preceding story (7. King Nimi), “Great King, … a king named Nimi who was the royal line’s endmost,” suggest that these stories follow on the story of King Mahādeva (6. Mahādeva) and are concerned with the royal lineage related to the city of Mithilā. In the list of these kings in the Saṅgha­bheda­vastu, there are twenty-two successive kings listed between King Nimi and King Ānanda, who is succeeded by his son, Ādarśamukha (SbhvG i 19–20).
n.­698
What is implied by the word “mirror” is not clear from the text. In the parallel in the Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya, the face of the prince is described as plain “like a mirror,” having no eyes, nose, or any other parts. On the other hand, J 257 gives the understanding that the face of the prince is pure and beautiful like a mirror.
n.­699
This verse is identical to the first half of the verse spoken by Pūrṇa’s father in the Bhv, with slight differences in wording in the Tibetan translation. See 2.­119. The verse also appears many times in the MSV and has parallels in other texts (e.g., Uv I.22).
n.­700
The following story of Daṇḍin is absent in Ch. In Ch., the sentence concluding the episode of King Ādarśamukha’s enthronement is directly followed by that commencing the passage on a famine (see 9.­520), and there is no indication of abbreviation of any story.
n.­701
Tib. shing skam; Skt. śākhoṭakavṛkṣa “śākhoṭaka tree.” Cf. MW “Trophis Aspera (a small, crooked, ugly tree).”
n.­702
Tib. bdag phyogs gcig tu ni sreg pa’i skad ’byin la, phyogs gzhan du ni skad gzhan ’byin pa; Skt. aham ekasmin pradeśe tittireti vāśitaṃ karomi aparasmiṃ pradeśa uttireti (fol. 172v9) (“I call tittira in one place, and uttira in another place”). Cf. yatrotittireti tatra (173v1) (“Where it calls utittira”).
n.­703
S ’dri bas; D ’di bas (Skt. pṛcchati “asked”).
n.­704
S song zin; D song phrin.
n.­705
It is worth noting that there is no mention of Daṇḍin’s story in this remark by the Buddha; hence the remark can directly follow the story of King Ādarśamukha’s enthronement, as seen in Ch. Hence Daṇḍin’s story was probably inserted into the story of King Ādarśamukha’s enthronement and donations at some stage in the redaction of the MSV.
n.­706
Section number 9.10.6.9 in BhvY (p. 344ff.).
n.­707
Section number 9.10.6.9.1 in BhvY (p. 344ff.). This story is narrated in both Tib. and Skt., but is absent in Ch.
n.­708
Section number 9.10.6.9.2 in BhvY (p. 345ff.). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, V; German trsl. from Ch., Li 2012. Parallel stories: Divy 30 Sudhana­kumārāvadāna (English trsl., Tatelman 2005, 219–307); fragments of the Sudhana­kumārāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts (Kudō 2015, 255–58); Mv ii 94–105; Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā 25 (Khoroche 2017, 147ff.); BAK 64 (Straube 2006); the Sudhanajātaka in the Paññāsajātaka (Tanabe 1981, 1983); Liudu jijing 六度集經 83 (Taishō no. 152, 3.44b–46b); and the Khotanese Sudhanāvadāna (de Chiara 2013).
n.­709
A stock passage about a peaceful kingdom. Here, the word kalaha (“combat,” between “fighting” and “dispute”) is omitted, and the translations of “dispute” and “strife” are different from those in 8.­302. Cf. 9.­540.
n.­710
Skt. gives the names of the birds in a different order: “haṃsas, kāraṇḍavas, and cakravākas.”
n.­711
Tib. rang gi srog la yang mi lta bar (lit., “not seeing their life”); Skt. svajīvitāpekṣayā (“with consideration about their life”). As Hiraoka has noted (2007, ii. 240n17), Tib. seems to translate *svajīvitānapekṣayā (“without consideration about their life”).
n.­712
Skt. lists “deer” before “rabbits.”
n.­713
Tib. de pha ma dang bral ba las byung ba’i sdug bsngal myong bar ’gyur ro// rgyal po dang yul mis phrogs na de la khyod kyis ji ltar bya (“ ‘He will experience the pain of separation from his parents.’ ‘If the king and the people take [him], what would you do to him?’ ”); Skt. mātā­pitṛ­viyogajam asya duḥkhaṃ syād rājño rāṣṭrasya ca <|> yo ’paharati tasya tvaṃ kiṃ kuryāḥ. The present translation is based on Skt.
n.­714
Tib. bdag thob pa bzhin du; Skt. pṛthivīlaṃbha­prakhyena (“as if [he] had attained the earth”); Ch. 如得大地之物 (“as if [he] had attained [every]thing on the earth”).
n.­715
The following is a stock passage about a prayer for the birth of a son. For parallels, see Hiraoka 2002b, 158–59.
n.­716
Skt. “Śiva, Varuṇa, Kubera, Śakra, Brahmā, and so forth.” Ch. does not refer to these gods.
n.­717
For this phrase, see n.­63.
n.­718
Although a gandharva is generally regarded as a kind of celestial being, in the Buddhist context of rebirth the word indicates a being in the intermediate state of transmigration (antarābhava). Cf. Kṣv D tha F.125.a; Kritzer 2014, 40. Cf., also, Anālayo 2008, 95–96. Ch. “First, father; second, mother; and third, passion arising.” However, in a similar passage in the Kṣv, Ch. agrees with Tib. (Taishō no. 1451, 24.253a; Kritzer ibid., 39–40).
n.­719
These three conditions are seen in the Āśvalāyana­sūtra of the Madhyamāgama quoted in AKUp 3016–17. Cf. AKBh 121.22–23; Honjō 2014, i 297–301.
n.­720
Ch. abbreviates the following four characteristics.
n.­721
A stock passage about a wise woman. For parallels, see Hiraoka 2002b, 159. Cf., also, Hara 1984 and Matsumura 1988a, 173–76.
n.­722
Ch. “left.”
n.­723
For these five dairy products (Skt.: kṣīra, dadhi, navanīta, sarpis, sarpirmaṇḍa) explained in Pāli and Vedic literature, see Nishimura 2014 and Hirata et al. 2013.
n.­724
Ch. abbreviates the stock passage about the eight nurses and various foods.
n.­727
Tib. legs ldan; Skt. bhagavat. Cf. the sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa, which differentiates the Tibetan translation of bhagavat as the Buddha and that of bhagavat as a worldly individual (Ishikawa 1990, 6–7).
n.­728
Although a kinnara is described as half human and half horse, half human and half bird, etc., in different sources (Sadakata 1979), it seems that in this story the kinnara does not look any different from a human.
n.­729
Ch. abbreviates the following description of Manoharā.
n.­730
Tib. yul gyi mi bas bzang ba; Skt. jana­pada­kalyāṇī (“just as beauties presented from the provinces”). Cf. Mvy 7630: yul gi bzang mo (this translation is used in the Cīv and the Sbhv: ga F.79.b; ga F.273.b).
n.­731
S ltem pa; D ldem pa.
n.­732
Skt. here adds “having beautiful eyebrows.”
n.­733
Although tilaka (Tib. thig le) is usually regarded as a mark painted on the forehead, there are examples of tilaka painted on cheeks in the Rāmāyaṇa (Matsuyama 1980–2002, 7).
n.­734
Skt. here adds “painted palms.”
n.­735
For this phrase, the present translation mainly follows the Divy because of the difficulty in understanding the Tib., which misses several words that are in the former.
n.­736
Skt. does not give the words “chariots as large as heavenly vehicles.” Neither does Divy 30.
n.­737
Divy 30 gives this sentence as a verse (śloka), but that in the Skt. of the Bhv does not match the meter.
n.­738
This dream and the king’s reaction to it resemble those in the story of King Agnidatta (8.­122).
n.­739
Tib. mi ma yin pa. The Tibetan translation of kinnara here is different from that in the other part of the story: mi’am ci/mi’am ci mo.
n.­740
This verse has parallels in various works of Indian literature and might be a popular Hindu maxim: e.g., MBh 1.75.15, Pañcatantra 1.386, etc. In the MSV, the verse appears also in the Vvbh (nya F.118a.1–2; Taishō no. 1442, 23.878b15–16; cf. Divy 37, p. 565), where it is introduced by an evil minister to a king.
n.­741
S nor bzangs; D nor bzangs su.
n.­742
S ba glang mo; D ban glang mo.
n.­743
S da ni; D de ni.
n.­744
Tib. lam chu sgra can; Skt. kūjako jalapathaḥ. Tib. seems to take these two words in Skt. as the name of one mountain.
n.­745
Tib. phur pa’i dbyibs. Tib. differentiates the translation of Utkīlaka here from that of Utkīlaka appearing just after the Himalaya, phur pa’i rtse.
n.­746
Tib. mi g.yo ba (“unmoving”). GM emends the reading of the manuscript avevāṇa to adhunāna, probably on the basis of Tib. However, Ch. abifuna 阿鼻縛那 seems to be closer to avevāṇa.
n.­747
Skt. has siṃhaka (“a (small?) lion”) against Tib., Ch., and Divy 30, which all have “sheep.”
n.­748
The word “yellow” qualifies “a cave” in the next sentence in Skt., NBhv, Ch., and the Divy.
n.­749
Ch. translates all the following verses in prose.
n.­750
Ch. gives bodengzhi 波登祇 after Tapanī.
n.­751
Although this list of the names of rivers is translated as a verse in Tib., it is prose in Skt.
n.­752
Skt. gives prose for “The Rudanī … with a sharp weapon.”
n.­753
Ch. translates the following verses in prose.
n.­754
Ch. translates the following verse in prose.
n.­755
Ch. translates the following verse in prose.
n.­756
The following eighteen folios of the Gilgit manuscript are lost, and the text in GM 149.6–159 has been supplemented on the basis of Divy 30.
n.­757
In Ch., the first two items of the list in Tib. and the Divy have been combined into one: 一者丈夫思婦、婦思丈夫。二者婦被夫瞋責 。 (“The first are a man loving a woman and a woman loving a man. The second is a woman being censured by her husband”).
n.­758
The present translations of the third and fourth items of the list are highly tentative. The readings of the extant materials here are all different: Tib. srog chags ngur pa dang / chom rkun pa’i ra bgo (N go) dang; NBhv utkrośaḥ prāṇī cor. .e .. ///; Divy 30 utkrośa ṛṇī caurasenāpatir; Ch. 三者作賊之人。四者軍將. See Shackleton-Bailey 1951, 96; BHSD utkrośa, Hiraoka 2007, ii 256–57n258–61. Tib. srog chags (“living being”) corresponds to NBhv prāṇī. However, Tib. ngur pa (“the red wild duck”) does not match utkrośa (“osprey”), which both NBhv and the Divy give, but rather indicates cakravāka, as Shackleton-Bailey suggests and as is attested in this very story (9.­535; cf., also, Mvy 4885). In spite of the absence of support in Sanskrit materials, referring to cakravāka makes perfect sense in this context, as a pair of this kind of bird is said to carry on a conversation at night when they are apart from each other (Dave 2005, 450–51, where cakravāka is identified with “the Ruddy Sheldrake” (Shelduck)). The present translator previously suggested in a footnote to her Japanese translation that ngur pa should be read as the verb ngur ba (“to grunt”) on the basis of the meaning of utkrośa (“outcry”), regarding srog chags ngur ba (“beings making a noise”) as a translation of utkrośaḥ prāṇī found in NBhv (BhvY 361n4). However, there remains a possibility that the Skt. original of Tib. read cakravāka. Given the strong association of the context and the characteristic of cakravāka mentioned above, it could have happened that cakravāka replaced utkrośa at some stage in the textual transmission. A development in the opposite direction, however, seems less likely. Hence, the present translation simply takes the meaning of the Tibetan word. As for the fourth item, the meaning of ra bgo/go is unclear to the present translator, who therefore had to treat it as a translation of senāpati. However, the word senāpati (“the general of an army”) seems somewhat strange for indicating the chief of thieves. It is worth noting that Ch. “The third is a person committing thievery. The fourth is the general of an army” seems to take prāṇī to be related to cauraḥ and separates these two words from senāpati.
n.­759
Tib. gal te bdag sgo nas song na rgyal po’i sgo srungs kyi srung ma gtum po dag yod de/ de rnams kyis bdag chad pas gcod pa’am, srog dang bral bar byed par ’gyur gyis; NBhv ///(da)[ṇḍ](e)notsād(ayi)[ṣ](ya)ti vā ghātayiṣ[y]ati vā yanv a[h](am)/// “[subject in sg.] will destroy [object] in punishment or kill [him/them]. I will now …”; Divy yadi dvāreṇa yāsyāmi rājā dvārapālakān rakṣakāṃś ca daṇḍenotsādayiṣyati (“If I go through the gate, the king will destroy the gatekeepers and guards in punishment”); Ch. 我若從門而出、父母必罪守門之人 (“If I go out through the gate, my father and mother will certainly punish the man/men guarding the gate”). The Divy and Ch. agree in presenting the king or the parents as the agent of the act of punishing and the gatekeeper/gatekeepers as its object, whereas Tib. gives the gatekeepers as the agent and “me,” the prince himself, as the object. Cf. Shackleton-Bailey 1951, 96; Hiraoka 2007, ii 257n262. The two verbs surviving in NBhv agree with Tib., whereas the Divy gives only the first verb. However, the verb form is singular in NBhv, unlike in Tib., where the agent is clearly plural. Therefore, there are at least two possible readings for NBhv, i.e., “the king will destroy or kill the gatekeepers” and “the gatekeeper will destroy or kill me.”
n.­760
S blong ba bdag; D blong bdag.
n.­761
Note that Manoharā has not left this message in the preceding part of the story. The message is absent in Ch.
n.­762
Tib. shin tu ’o ma ’dzag; Divy sūdayā. Ch. does not mention the name of the medicine. NBhv seems to give “+ dhā” (perhaps sudhā, a divine beverage?). The meaning of Tib. may suggest sudugha as its original Skt. Thus, the extant materials hardly agree with each other, and “sūdayā” in the present translation, which is based on the Divy, is only tentative.
n.­763
The passage “You should obtain these medicines … and a lute” does not appear in the words of Manoharā in the preceding part of the story.
n.­764
Tib. gzhon nu ’bad pa ’dis ci bya/ yid ’phrog ma ’dis ci zhig dgos/ khyod gcig pu ni grogs med pa// lus gdon za bar ’gyur gyis thong // (S gdon za bar; D gdon mi za bar); Divy alaṃ kumāra kim anena vyavasāyena kiṃ manoharayā tvam ekākī asahāyaḥ śarīrasaṃśayam avāpsyasīti; Ch 汝獨一身。無有伴侶。何須苦覓彼悦意耶。定當捨命. This passage is prose in the Divy and Ch. and does not form a verse in some editions of Tib. The final quarter of this “verse” is hard to make sense of for the present translator without the help of the Divy. D gdon mi za bar (“without doubt”) is a phrase frequently appearing in the Bhv as a translation of various Skt. words such as nūnam, niyatam, avaśyam, and addhā. In contrast, the phrase without negation, gdon za bar, rarely, if ever, appears in the entire MSV. In the present context, gdon za bar is most likely a translation of saṃśaya, meaning “danger” here (MW, q.v.), and it is probable that the unusual phrase gdon za bar was replaced by the familiar gdon mi za bar in the textual transmission. However, Ch. 定 (“certainly”) seems to be a translation of asaṃśayam.
n.­765
Although the passage “The prince saw the prosperous city … draw water” is prose in Tib., it is a verse in the Divy and Ch.
n.­766
Here the Divy gives three verses spoken by Druma, which are absent in Tib. and Ch., and probably in NBhv, too, judging from the text available only in small fragments. For the verses in question, see Jaini 1966 and Dimitrov 2008, 55n38.
n.­767
Again, the Divy gives two verses spoken by kinnaras which are absent in Tib. and Ch., and probably in NBhv, too.
n.­768
For the notion seen in various works of Indian literature that declaring the truth brings about the result desired by the declarer, see Brown 1972 and Nattier 2000, 87n49.
n.­769
Section number 9.10.6.10 in BhvY (p. 369ff.). Strangely enough, the famous story of Prince Viśvantara appears twice in succession in Tib. and NBhv here, and these two stories (Viś I and Viś II) share a rough outline with differences in many details. Ch. has only Viś I. Each of the two stories has some elements absent in the other (scenes, conversations, proper names, etc.), and therefore neither is simply an abbreviated or expanded version of the other. Among various editions of Tib., the Stok Palace manuscript (S) shows a unique recension in which Viś I is absent and two passages from Viś I have been inserted in Viś II (Yao 2012b).There are further parallels in the Sbhv (Viś III: SbhvG ii 119–33; Degé nga F.192.a–200.b; Taishō no. 1450 24.181a–184b. English trsl. from Tib. Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882: XVI), the Viśvantarāvadāna in the Gilgit manuscripts (Viś IV: Das Gupta 1978; Matsumura 1980, 119–18 and 272–333. Cf., also, Tsai 2000), and BAK 23, etc. (Lamotte (1944–80, ii 713–15n1; Hikata 1978, appendix 116; Panglung 1981, 40–41; Murakami 1984, 35 and 47n31). Cf. Panglung 1980, 229, Durt 1999 and 2000, and Anālayo 2017, 113–41.
n.­770
Section number 9.10.6.10.1 in BhvY (p. 369ff.). For the absence of this story in S and some other manuscripts belonging to the same lineage, see Yao 2012b and Clarke 2018.
n.­771
This stock phrase is not abbreviated in Viś II.
n.­772
Due to the abbreviation of the stock passage, including the naming of the prince, the mention of the prince’s name in the following story appears abrupt. Ch. and Viś II abbreviate only the passage following the prince’s naming.
n.­773
The following story as far as the giving of a chariot is different from the plot of Viś II. The latter is as follows: (1) the prince gives everything, and thus he is called Sarvaṃdada, “Giver of Everything”; (2) the prince marries Mādrī and has a son and a daughter; and (3) the neighboring minor kings are jealous of King Viśvāmitra for his best elephant. In Viś I, due to the absence of these narrative elements, the name Sarvaṃdada mentioned later looks abrupt. Viś I explains this name, Sarvaṃdada, in the final part of the story (9.­835).
n.­774
spug is identified with musāragalva in Mvy 5956, the exact meaning of which is unclear, and there are various translations offered by scholars, such as sapphire, emerald, coral, and cat’s-eye (BHSD s.v.).
n.­775
Tib. thams cad gtong; Viś III Sarvada/Sarvaṃdada. Although the name is spelled in these two ways in Viś III, its Tib. counterpart is uniform, and so the present translation uses only Sarvaṃdada. There are stories of a king named Sarvaṃdada who is eager to make donations in BAK 55 and other texts, but these stories are completely different from the story of Viśvantara here (cf. Okano 2008).
n.­776
Tib. rgyal srid ’phel; Viś III Rājavardhana/Rājyavardhana. Ch. does not give the elephant’s name.
n.­777
The phrase “when spring came … jīvaṃjīvakas were singing” is absent in Viś II.
n.­778
In Viś II, Viśvantara voluntarily leaves for the forest after a brief conversation with the king (9.­860).
n.­779
Viś II gives a verse similar to this verse (9.­859), with some difference in the Tibetan wording. The next verse, “If begged…,” is absent in Viś II.
n.­780
N, T bstan; D, P bsten. Cf. Viś III sarva­janasyātmā upadarśayitavyaḥ.
n.­781
The conversation between Viśvantara and Mādrī in Viś II (9.­861) is briefer than the above. Viśvantara in Viś II explicitly mentions the possibility that he will give Mādrī to others, whereas he does not mention it (or only hints it) in Viś I.
n.­782
This scene, in which the citizens follow Viśvantara, is absent in Viś II.
n.­783
“Thirty yojanas” both in Viś III and in Ch.
n.­784
Again, “thirty yojanas” both in Viś III and in Ch.
n.­785
The Sanskrit names of the two children are attested in Viś II in NBhv. Ch. does not give their names and only refers to them as “son and daughter.” There is a strange disagreement between the Bhv (Viś I Tib.; Viś II Tib. and NBhv) and two other parallels (Viś III Skt.; Viś IV) about the gender of the children. In the latter, the son is called Jālin and the daughter Kṛṣṇājinā/Kṛṣṇā, and Viśvantara is said to carry the daughter and Mādrī the son. It is notable that Viś III Tib. agrees with the Bhv against Viś III Skt. in both the gender of the names and the combination of each child and its carrier. Although Viś III Ch. does not give their names, it at least agrees with Tib. in who carries the son and who carries the daughter. In many parallels of this story, such as Pāli J 547, the Cariyāpiṭaka, Taishō no. 152, Taishō no. 171, the Jātakamālā by Āryaśūra, and BAK 23, the gender of the names agrees with Viś III Skt. and Viś IV, but Pāli sources explicitly state that the prince carries the son and his wife the daughter because the son is older and hence heavier. The present translator has not found any textual source providing the name Kṛṣṇa and Jālinī or their translations other than Viś I Tib., Viś II Tib. and NBhv, and Viś III Tib.
n.­786
“A valley on Mount Kailāsa” in Viś II (9.­876).
n.­787
In Ch., this brahmin is said to be Indra in disguise. All the extant versions of Viś III (Skt., Ch., and Tib.) agree with Viś I Tib. here in not mentioning Indra. Durt has noted that identifying this brahmin with Indra causes contradictions in the later development of the story, in which Indra makes the brahmin sell the children (2000, 138). According to Anālayo, the identification of the brahmin with Indra is seen in a Newar story and a Tibetan painting, too (2016a, 17).
n.­788
This mention of “husband and wife” looks rather abrupt. In contrast, Viś II explains the brahmin’s story from his birth to his marriage and the wife’s demand for a servant.
n.­789
Ch. translates this verse in prose.
n.­790
Tib. khyod kyi med do zhes bya ba’i tshig gis kho bo’i yid la re ba kun tu rtog pa’i rta btab na myur du ldog par ’gyur ro; Viś III ms: … tac chīghraṃ saṃkalpa­turagasya manorathasya tad­vacanāstikya­pratyāhatasya me nirvṛtir bhavet*. Probably tad­vacanāstikya- might be emended tvad­vacananāstikya-, as Tib. might suggest (cf. SBhvG ii 125.6) (“Hence, quickly, there should be the satisfaction of my wish/chariot of mind, whose horses are thoughts, which was rejected by your word and disbelief”). There is a word play about manoratha “wish” (lit., “heart’s joy,” MW, q.v.) using the double meaning of ratha, “chariot” and “joy.” Tib. seems to read nivṛttir (“return”) instead of nirvṛtir (“satisfaction”).
n.­791
This verse is absent in Ch., and it is placed at the beginning of the conversation between the brahmin and Viśvantara in Viś II (9.­886). Viś II does not have the following passages as far as the children’s departure.
n.­792
Viś III and Ch. give these words of the ascetic in verse.
n.­793
Viś II mentions “Śakra, Lord of the Gods” instead of “a deity,” (9.­895) and gives “Mādrīis coming to deter the bodhisattva from giving donations” as the content of the thought.
n.­794
This is another example of declaring the truth for the purpose of realizing a certain wish. See n.­768.
n.­795
Viś III Skt. “saying ‘Mother is not seen.’ ”
n.­796
Tib. krung krung (Viś III Tib. khrung khrung) (“crane”); Viś III in Skt. and Viś IV kurarī. The term krung krung/khrung khrung is frequently used as a translation of krauñca (cf. 3.­127, 8.­303, 9.­3, 9.­723; cf., also, Mvy 4884), which means “crane” (Dave 2005, 309–21). On the other hand, according to Dave, kurara can mean various species of birds, such as demoiselle crane, osprey, fishing eagle, gull, tern, and curlew, and its female form kurarī signifies either tern or curlew, depending on the context. The call note of the kurarī is commonly used in similes as a reference to the “sorrowful wail of women” (ibid., 342–43). Dave quotes from the Buddhacarita 8.51 the example “distressed as if a kurarī who lost a chick,” which is quite similar to the simile in the present context, and identifies this kurarī with the river or black-bellied tern because the curlew breeds outside India (ibid., 348).Thus, we have a fairly clear understanding of the name of this bird in Viś III in Skt. and Viś IV. The problem lies in the Tib. of Viś I and Viś III: is kurarī the original Sanskrit of krung krung/khrung khrung? Since both kurara and krauñca can mean a kind of crane (ibid., 310–11), it is possible that the translator used the same translation for these two words. However, there also remains the possibility that the original Skt. text on which Tib. was based had the reading krauñca. Therefore, the present translator has simply translated the Tibetan word as “crane,” reserving judgment about its Skt. original.
n.­797
D bla ma brtag dka’ ba should be emended to bla ma rtag dga’ ba. Cf. Viś III D bla ma rtag dga’ bas; Viś III Skt. -guru­priyau sadā.
n.­798
D nags su should be emended to gnas su. Cf. Viś III D gnas su; Viś III Skt. sthānakeṣu.
n.­799
Viś III Skt. svāṃ dārāṃ (“to give my own wife”).
n.­800
D nyid kyi phyir should be emended to nyid kyi mi. Cf. Viś III D nyid kyi mi; Viś III Skt. svajanān.
n.­801
P tshol; D chol. NBhv parimṛgayan.
n.­802
Tib. de nas mche ba bzang po yi// chung ma byang chub ’dod phyir btang (D, P, N, T; H bzang po’i); Skt. (Viś III) tataḥ patnīṃ sudaṃṣṭrasya tyajato bodhi­kāṃkṣayā (NBhv and Viś IV basically agree with this) (“Then, when he who had beautiful teeth abandoned [his] wife with the wish for awakening”). Given the above Skt. and the fact that Viśvantara is referred to as “he who has beautiful teeth” earlier in this story, Tib. might be emended to “de nas mche ba bzang po yis.” Ch. gives this sentence in prose and does not mention “beautiful teeth.”
n.­803
Ch. gives the following words of Śakra in prose.
n.­804
P dbon po; D dpon po.
n.­805
Unlike Tib., this sentence is given in verse in the two Skt. sources, Viś III and NBhv, and is absent in Ch.
n.­806
“To śramaṇas, brahmins,” in Viś II (9.­910).
n.­807
It is worth noting that the concluding passage of Viś I only refers to the acts of giving donations and making merit that are briefly mentioned at the end of the story, ignoring most of the story that is concerned with giving his children and wife away. In contrast, the corresponding passage in Viś II (9.­913) refers to giving the children and wife away.
n.­808
Section number 9.10.6.10.2 in BhvY (p. 381ff.).
n.­809
Tib. ngan to re. The episode of the brahmin’s birth is absent in Viś I and Viś III, whereas Viś IV gives it, providing his name, Jujjuka. Viś III too provides the name Jujjuka (Tib. dzu dzu ka) at the end of the story. However, it is not certain to the present translator that Tib. ngan to re in Viś II is a translation of Jujjuka. Cf. Jūjaka in J 547.
n.­810
Tib. shin tu gzhon pa (lit., “very young”); Skt. (NBhv, Viś IV) sukumārā.
n.­811
Instead of this sentence, S gives a passage from Viś I: “Then the two children knew that their father really intended to give them . . . . She hurried to the hermitage because of the quaking of the great earth” (9.­770–9.­781).
n.­812
The Tib. gives slightly different translations of this verse in Viś I (9.­782) and Viś II. It is unknown whether such difference reflects any difference in the original Skt. The present English translation follows the Tib.
n.­813
Instead of the passage “Thereupon Mādrī went to the hermitage . . . .Why did you abandon them?” S gives a passage from Viś I: “Thereupon, seeing inauspicious signs, Mādrī paused to think . . . . Liberate beings from existence” (9.­784–9.­810). However, this insertion from Viś I makes the narrative order somewhat unnatural: at the end of this inserted passage, Mādrī has finished lamenting her lost children and rather encourages Viśvantara to keep his resolution to give everything away, whereas in the following passage the prince is responding to her reproach of him for having given the children away.
n.­814
Section number 9.10.6.11 in BhvY (p. 388ff.). The story has parallels in the Vvbh (D nya F.195.a–b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.892c27–28), a part of Divy 36 Mākandikāvadāna (the chapter itself is parallel to the Vvbh; the correspondence with the present story is in 540.1–14), Sbhv (SbhvG ii 14–16; nga F.119.a–120.b; Ch. missing), Xianyu jing 賢愚経 30 (Taishō no. 202, 4.386aff.), and D no. 341 mdzangs blun zhes bya ba’i mdo, chap. 34 (mdo sde a F.247.a ff.). The story also has parts in common with the story of Triśaṅku and that of Miṇḍhaka in the Bhv (5. Triśaṅku and E. The Former Lives of the Miṇḍhaka Family, respectively).
n.­815
Here ends the correspondence with the Vvbh and Divy 36.
n.­816
Here ends the correspondence with the Sbhv.
n.­817
Section number 9.10.7 in BhvY (p. 391ff.). The order of the stories in this section generally corresponds to that in the Merv-av. See notes to the title of each story. Cf., also, Yao forthcoming b.
n.­818
Panglung points out that the entry stag mo (“tigress”) in P does not match the story (1980, 228). Since the story describes a king, the main character, welcoming another king with various preparations including food, D and S ston mo (“banquet”) seems to be less problematic.
n.­819
Section number 9.10.7.1 in BhvY (p. 391ff.). Parallel stories: Vvbh (D nya F.176.a–183.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.888a–889c), MĀc 136 商人求財経, EĀc 45.1, J 196, etc. A brief mention in Merv-av, 156. Divy 36, which corresponds to a part of the Vvbh listed above, abbreviates this story, referring to the Rākṣasīsūtra (524.20). Cf., also, Divy 8, which is a story partially corresponding to the present section.
n.­820
Ch. abbreviates the following story, referring to the “Sūtra of Yakṣa in the section of Saṃgīti in the Madhyamāgama”: 於中阿笈摩僧祇得分藥叉經中廣説. NBhv agrees with Ch. in abbreviating this story.
n.­821
Although the text says de rnams ’di snyam du sems te (“they thought thus”), the following sentences seem to be spoken to others.
n.­822
In the Vvbh, it is revealed to readers at this point that these women are rākṣasīs and that they came to the merchants because one of their two fortune-telling banners, the one that reveals good fortune, had shaken (cf. Hartmann 1991).
n.­823
In the Vvbh, this character is named Siṃhala.
n.­824
These two verses have parallels in Uv 21.14–15.
n.­825
Section number 9.10.7.2 in BhvY (p. 396ff.). Parallel story: Merv-av, 156.
n.­826
S gang gis; D gang gi.
n.­827
S gang gis; D gang gi.
n.­828
Section number 9.10.7.3 in BhvY (p. 397ff.). For parallel stories, see Merv-av, 159n7.
n.­829
Sentient beings are classified into three according to their determination toward awakening: those who will attain awakening; those who will be reborn in hell; and those who are as yet undetermined. Cf. AKBh 157.10–21.
n.­830
Tib. dbang po (*īśvara, cf. Mvy 3129). However, this name looks problematic because Īśvara is usually an epithet of Śiva, who is the first member of the present list of gods. NBhv gives Vāsava instead of Īśvara. Cf. ka F.308.a and kha F.206.b.
n.­831
The parallels of this story in Merv-av and BAK provide a variety of names for the snake: Paṃphā, Kaṅkā, and Phampa in Tibetan (see Merv-av 158n37). However, none of these names seems to correspond to the name preserved in Tib. of the Bhv, zhags pa lta bu “Like a Noose (pāśa).” Ch. does not give any name for the snake.
n.­832
Here the text suggests an abbreviation, and NBhv agrees. However, the stock passage concluding the story is not actually abbreviated.
n.­833
Section number 9.10.7.4 in BhvY (p. 398ff.). This story has a parallel in SbhvG ii 177–178; nga F.232.b–233.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.195b. For other parallels, see Merv-av 159n8.
n.­834
Although the word amṛta indicates divine nectar, “the fruit of an amṛta,” amṛtaphala, is the fruit of a kind of plant belonging to the family Cucurbitaceae (MW, q.v.).
n.­835
Section number 9.10.7.5 in BhvY (p. 398ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 161n10.
n.­836
Skt. ṭīṭibha (NBhv); Ch. niao 鳥 (“bird”). Cf. Dave 2005, 357–60.
n.­837
Section number 9.10.7.6 in BhvY (p. 399ff.). The Merv-av gives a story of a parrot in the same order as the Bhv, but the story is quite different from the present one in the Bhv. See Merv-av 160n13. The story in the Bhv has parallels in J 329 and the Mahāsāṅghika Vinaya (Taishō no. 1425, 22.258b–c).
n.­838
Ch. gives the opposite meaning: 正紹王位、以法化世 (“He rightly succeeded to the throne and guided the world through the law”).
n.­839
Section number 9.10.7.7 in BhvY (p. 399ff.). Parallel: Merv-av 162.
n.­840
S sred pas; D srid pas.
n.­841
Section number 9.10.7.8 in BhvY (p. 400ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 163n16.
n.­842
Section number 9.10.7.9 in BhvY (p. 401ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 163n17.
n.­843
In Ch., susina 蘇斯那 (Susena) is the older brother and sina 斯那 (Sena) the younger.
n.­844
Section number 9.10.7.10 in BhvY (p. 401ff.). For parallels, see Yao 2012a, 3.2.34 and Merv-av 167n21. Cf., also, Anālayo 2017, 294ff.
n.­845
Most of the following story is abbreviated in Ch., with which NBhv agrees.
n.­846
Section number 9.10.8 in BhvY (p. 403ff.). The order of the stories in this section generally corresponds to that in Merv-av.
n.­847
This summary of contents does not exist in Ch. NBhv seems to have included such a summary of contents, judging from the extant fragments.
n.­848
Section number 9.10.8.1 in BhvY (p. 403ff.). For parallels, see Merv-av 153n1. This story is related to the story of the brahmin girl Cañcā in the Bhv (M. The Insult by the Brahmin Girl Cañcā). Cf., also, BAK 49 (Straube 2009, 319–22).
n.­849
Although it is not entirely clear in Tib. whether it’s the six-tusked elephant or the she-elephant that follows the other, the verb bsnyen bkur byas so (“served”) may suggest that its agent is the she-elephant. NBhv, however, suggests that the six-tusked elephant is following the she-elephant: g(a)cchantīm a(nu)gac(cha)ti tiṣṭhantīm anutiṣṭhati.
n.­850
S lha; D lhas.
n.­851
The following two verses are absent in Ch.
n.­852
S ’khri shing; D – zhing.
n.­853
The following verse is translated as prose in Ch.
n.­854
The following words of the she-elephant are translated in verse in Ch.
n.­855
S nad pa des ni; D nad med pa des.
n.­856
This verse is translated in prose in Ch.
n.­857
Section number 9.10.8.2 in BhvY (p. 409ff.). This story has many parallels, including J 316 and BAK 104 (see Straube 2009, 335–37). Cf. Panglung 1981, 45; Hikata 1978, appendix 104–5.
n.­858
Ch. abbreviates the following story. NBhv seems to agree with Ch.
n.­859
S btsos pa’i; D bcos pa’i.
n.­860
Section number 9.10.8.3 in BhvY (p. 410ff.).
n.­861
Section number 9.10.8.3.1 in BhvY (p. 410ff.). This story has many parallels, including J 540 and BAK 101 (see Straube 2009, 332–35). Cf. Panglung 1981, 45–46; Hikata 1978, appendix 115. Merv-av mentions this story only in a summary of contents (Merv-av 176n126). For parallels in Chinese materials, see Hashimoto 2002; Andō 2008, 45. Cf., also, Brockington 2010, 95–100. For an edition and German translation of the story in the Bhv, see Demoto and Hahn 2010, 238–45. Schlingloff 1985 has pointed out the close relationship between the depiction of this story in Gandharan relief and the Bhv. Cf., also, Schlingloff 2000, 31 (Eng. 2013, 31).
n.­862
Ch. abbreviates the following story. NBhv agrees with Ch.
n.­863
Tib. mi ma yin pa. Demoto and Hahn (2010, 240n58) regard this word as vyāḍa (“beast”) on the basis of Negi 4353b. However, the association of mi ma yin pa with vyāḍa in the dictionary is based on confusion between two passages in the Pravāraṇāvastu, where mi ma yin pa is the translation of amanuṣya (Chung 1998, 160–61, 204–5).
n.­864
Section number 9.10.8.3.2 in BhvY (p. 413ff.).
n.­865
Ch. suggests that the story is abbreviated here: 廣説應知 (“[How the story is to be] narrated in detail should be known”).
n.­866
Section number 9.10.8.4 in BhvY (p. 414ff.). This story is absent in Ch. and NBhv. Instead, Ch. mentions the title of a sūtra, Najia yaocha jing 那迦藥叉經 (Sūtra of the Yakṣa *Naka (?)), and then gives a brief summary of the next story, which is a story of the leader of the monkeys (parallel to J 407). NBhv agrees with Ch. in mentioning the leader of the monkeys. Due to the fragmentary state of NBhv, it is unknown if there was a title corresponding to the Najia yaocha jing in the manuscript. The following story of Prince Mūkapaṅgu has been translated into English from Tib. in Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, XIV. The story has parallels in J 538, etc. See Panglung 1981, 46 (note that Panglung seems to be confusing Taishō no. 1444 and Taishō no. 1442); Hikata 1978, appendix, 115; Zin 2004; Tamai 2017. There is a parallel in the Vvbh (cha F.89.a–95.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.723c–725c). The story in the Vvbh consists of two parts: the story of the prince’s birth, growth, and going forth (parallel to the following story in the Bhv) and the story of the same person as a teacher instructing disciples (parallel to another story in the Bhv: 2. The Story of the Teacher Mūkapaṅgu).
n.­867
The following passage until “she felt free” (9.­1141) is a stock passage about the birth of a son that we have already seen in the story of Sudhana. For details, see n.­715.
n.­868
This list of the names of gods is not identical to that in the story of Sudhana mentioned above.
n.­869
Tib. chu skyes. Schiefner in his German translation and Ralston in his English translation of the former reconstruct the name as Skt. Dshaladsha (Jalaja) and Abja, respectively. Cf. J 538 Temiya; BAK 37 Udaka (Zin 2004, 163–64).
n.­870
The idea that kingship leads one to hell has already been seen in the Bhv: see 3.­151.
n.­871
These questions of the king are translated as follows in the Chinese version of the parallel story in the Vvbh: 誰是汝讎? 我爲擯殺。誰是汝友? 我當惠之。 “Who is your enemy? I will expel or kill that person. Who is your friend? I will favor that person” (Taisho no.1442, 23.724c6–7).
n.­872
S brgyal nas; D brgya la na.
n.­873
Although MW describes kimpāka as “of a very bad taste,” the fruit appears as tasty but poisonous in J 85.
n.­874
Section number 9.10.8.5 in BhvY (p. 420ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 46–47; Hikata 1978, appendix 93–94.
n.­875
Ch. abbreviates the story, referring to the Zhi bensheng jing 雉本生經 (“The Jātaka of a Pheasant”). NBhv seems to agree with Ch.
n.­876
Section number 9.10.8.6 in BhvY (p. 421ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 47.
n.­877
Ch. abbreviates the story, referring to the Xiang bensheng jing 象本生經 (“The Jātaka of an Elephant”). NBhv agrees with Ch.
n.­878
Section number 9.10.8.7 in BhvY (p. 423ff.). For parallels, see Okada 1993. Cf. the rule against eating nāga flesh in the Bhv (Chapter Two. II. B. Nāga Flesh).
n.­879
Ch. abbreviates the story, referring to the Long bensheng jing 龍本生經 (“The Jātaka of a Nāga”). NBhv seems to agree with Ch.
n.­880
Section number 9.10.8.8 in BhvY (p. 423ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 48; Hikata 1978, appendix 113; Merv-av 155n3.
n.­881
Ch. abbreviates the story, referring to the E bensheng jing 鵝本生經 (“The Jātaka of a Goose”). NBhv seems to agree with Ch.
n.­882
Section number 9.10.9 in BhvY (p. 426ff.). This part of Tib. lacks a summary of contents. However, only S and the Shey Palace manuscript among the other editions the present translator examined (D, London, N, P, T) give a summary of contents (S kha F.348.a.6–7; Shey kha F.329.a.2–3). On the peculiarity of S and the Bhutanese recension, see Clarke 2018. Cf., also, Yao 2011. Ch. is completely silent about the four stories constituting this part. NBhv does not give the stories but only a list of protagonists, in which only the name of Govinda (the protagonist of the fourth story) is legible in a broken folio. For details, see Yao forthcoming b.
n.­883
Section number 9.10.9.1 in BhvY (p. 426ff.). This story has a parallel in MĀc 130 Jiao tanmi jing 教曇彌經. This sūtra is mentioned in the story of Araṇemi (3. The Story of the Teacher Araṇemi). For other parallels, see Yao 2012a, 3.2.35. Cf., also, Skilling 2000, 343 and Anālayo 2010, 70n52.
n.­884
Section number 9.10.9.2 in BhvY (p. 427ff.). In the Vvbh, this story follows the story of Mūkapaṅgu’s going forth (cha F.95.a–96.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.725c–726b). See n.­866.
n.­885
Section number 9.10.9.3 in BhvY (p. 429ff.). For parallels, see Ogihara 2011 and Yao 2012a, 3.2.36. Cf., also, Merv-av 168.
n.­886
Tib. chos ldan gyi mdo. Most probably this title indicates a parallel to MĀc 130. Note, however, that the reference is made only to the stock passage about the period when “the human lifespan was eighty thousand years,” and MĀc 130 does not include the story of Araṇemi. Note, also, that the stock passage is given in full in another part of the Bhv (4.­35).
n.­887
For this abbreviated passage, see 9.­1345–9.­1347 in the story of Govinda, where the practice of the four pure abodes is fully described.
n.­888
Cf. Uv 1.16cd.
n.­889
The meaning of this and the next similes is not clear to the present translator.
n.­890
Cf. Uv 1.13.
n.­891
Cf. Uv 1.14.
n.­892
Cf. Uv 1.15–16ab.
n.­893
N, Ph, R, S, T, U bram ze’i khye’u; D, P bram ze’i bu.
n.­894
This verse seems to be based on a sūtra parallel to MĀc 130 and AN 6.54 (cf., also, AN 7.70), where six teachers in a past time are listed (MĀc shanyan dashi 善眼大師, moulipoqunna 牟犁破群那, aluonazhe poluomen 阿羅那遮婆羅門, qutuolisheduo 瞿陀梨舍哆, haitipoluo mona 害提婆羅摩納, chutimoli qiaobingtuoluo 儲提摩麗橋鞞陀邏, AN Sunetta, Mugapakkha, Aranemi, Kuddālaka, Hatthipāla, and Jotipāla Govinda). In both sūtras, only the story of Sunetra (Sunetta, shanyan 善眼), who taught the Dharma to be reborn in the world of Brahmā, is narrated in full, and the other five characters are only said to have done the same thing as Sunetra. The first three and the last member of the list correspond to the protagonists of the four stories in I. The Bodhisattva as Four Teachers, in the Bhv in this order. The present translator has not been able to find any Sanskrit name corresponding to the Tibetan word ’joms byed (“Conqueror”), but the other name glang po skyong is undoubtedly a translation of Hastipāla. Probably the most likely interpretation of this verse is that it abbreviates the stories of two people, explaining that the stories are the same as that of Sunetra.
n.­895
Section number 9.10.9.4 in BhvY (p. 432ff.). This story has a parallel in DĀ 14 Govindasūtra (see Hartmann and Wille 2014, 140). For other parallels, see Yao 2012a, 3.2.37.
n.­896
Diśāṃpati and Reṇu are included in the royal lineage beginning with King Mahāsammata. See SbhvG i 20.5 (diśāṃpatir eṇḍaḥ in the edition should be corrected to diśāṃpati<r> reṇuḥ).
n.­898
Tib. bram ze chen po gnag lhas skyes “the Great Brahmin Govinda.” Cf. DĀ 14, fol. 274r7–8 brāhmaṇo mahā­govindo.
n.­899
D tshangs pa kun bged gzhon nu; S – kun ’gyid gzhon nu. Read – kun ’byed gzhon nu (cf. Mvy 3459).
n.­900
mdun na ’don bdun byung ba gang yin pa ni (lit., “Seven ministers who appeared were …”). Probably Tib. is based on a misreading of the word saptapurohita (“minister of seven [kings]”). Cf. parallels in the DN, DĀc, etc.
n.­901
Section number 9.10.9.5 in BhvY (p. 441ff.). For parallels, see Panglung 1981, 49–50; Sugimoto 1993, 260; Murakami 1984; Hikata 1978, appendix 42. For an edition and German translation of this story in Tib., see Schlingloff 1977. Cf., also, BAK 1 and BAK 100 in Straube 2009; Bingposha lun 鞞婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1547, 28.506b ff.).
n.­902
The following verses are translated in prose in Ch., whereas NBhv gives verses.
n.­903
Section number 9.10.9.6 in BhvY (p. 443ff.). For parallels, see Murakami 1984, 35, 45n24, 277–78, 280n17–20; Ogihara 2010.
n.­904
Section number 9.10.10 in BhvY (p. 444ff.). For the names of the buddhas in the past mentioned in this section and the next, see Murakami 1984, 273–76, 283. Cf. AKBh 266.14.
n.­905
The verses in this section are translated in prose in Ch. These verses have parallels in the next section.
n.­906
D bdun khri lnga stong; S bdun khri bdun stong (“seventy-seven thousand”). Cf. Ch. 七万五千 (“seventy-five thousand”).
n.­907
Ch. baoji 寶髻 (*Ratnaśikhin). However, in the next section Ch. agrees with Tib. about the final buddha of the second incalculably long eon: dishichuang 帝釋幢 (*Indradhvaja).
n.­908
Ch. 第三阿僧企耶初供養寶髻佛乃至安隱佛。如是供養七萬七千佛。如是又至迦攝波佛 。 (“In the third incalculably long eon, I first served the Buddha Ratnaśikhin and continued up to the Buddha Kṣemaṃkara. Thus I served seventy-seven thousand buddhas. Thus I continued up to the Buddha Kāśyapa”). Note that in the next section, Tib. gives Kṣemaṃkara (Tib. bde mdzad) as the first buddha of the third incalculably long eon.
n.­909
Section number 9.10.11 in BhvY (p. 445ff.). For the murals in Bezeklik, Turfan (eleventh to twelfth c.), representing the verses in this section of the Bhv, see Murakami 1984. The title of this section, “Section of Many Buddhas,” is given at the end of the section. For parallels, see Ogihara 2015a and 2016a; Tournier 2017, esp. Chap. 2. Some of the reconstructions of Skt. names of buddhas in the present translation are based on their Tocharian parallels given in Ogihara 2015a.
n.­910
This verse and the next verse are quoted in AKUp 4069 with reference to sangs rgyas mang po’i rtogs pa brjod pa (“avadānas of many Buddhas”?) in phran tshegs (*Kṣudraka). This quotation suggests that “Section of Many Buddhas” may have been a text included in the Kṣudraka­piṭaka or Kṣudrakāgama of the Mūla­sarvāstivādins. See Dhammadinnā 2018.
n.­911
Tib. mi dbang. Note that this buddha is referred to as dbang chen or Mahendra in the list of the buddhas’ names following these verses (Tib. And NBhv) and in the murals in Bezeklik.
n.­912
It is doctrinally impossible for multiple buddhas to appear in a world at the same time. The Mv mentions sixty-two buddhas all named Śikhin who appeared successively (iii 235). It is probable that the present verse also implies that the thirty Śikhins appeared in the world one by one and that “I,” the present buddha, was born as a king in the city of Rājyavardhana each time a Śikhin appeared.
n.­913
Cf. the preceding verse.
n.­915
As to the buddha appearing in this and the following verse, Tib. gives the same name, skar rgyal (*Tiṣya), whereas it gives two different names, rgyal and skar rgyal, in the list of buddhas after this series of verses. Although Ch. here gives two different names, Disha 底沙 and Chensu 晨宿, they might be a phonetic transliteration and a translation of the same name, Tiṣya. The lists of past buddhas in some other texts such as the Mv differentiate two buddhas, Tiṣya and Puṣya (Tournier 2017, 158–59, n120). Cf. the Apidamo dapiposha lun 阿毘達磨大毘婆沙論, in which both names, Tiṣya and Puṣya, are connected to a single buddha (Taishō no. 1545, 27.890b9; Tournier 2017, 172n170).
n.­916
According to the Abhi­dharma­kośa­bhāṣya, generally it takes a hundred eons for bodhisattvas to accomplish the karma that causes the thirty-two marks of a buddha. However, Śākyamuni accomplished it in only ninety-one eons, due to his act of praising the Buddha Tiṣya with verses (AKBh 267.10–17). Cf., also, AKUp 4099 (Honjō 2014, ii 621); Tournier 2017, 170–72. In Ch., this verse and the following verses are translated in seven-syllable lines, whereas the preceding verses are in five-syllable lines.
n.­918
Ch. piposhi 毘婆尸 (*Vipaśyin).
n.­920
For this story, see SbhvG ii 108.28–110.28; nga F.185.a–186.a; Taishō no.1450, 24.178.b–c.
n.­921
These two lines refer to F. 3. Velāma.
n.­922
For this story, see SbhvG ii 4.20–11.10; nga F.111.b–116.b (Ch. missing).
n.­923
This line refers to F. 9. Sudhana.
n.­924
Sugimoto has identified this reference with the story of the bodhisattva Dashi 大施 in the Dazhidu lun 大智度論 (Taishō no. 1509, 25.89b). See Sugimoto 1993, 234.
n.­925
The story of Mahauṣadha is narrated in detail in the Kṣv (da F.54.a ff.; Taishō no. 1451, 24.334a ff.). For parallels, see Hikata 1978, appendix 116.
n.­927
Cf. ch. 26 Jājvalijātaka in Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā (Hahn 2011, 333–38; English trsl. Khoroche 2017, 176–79). Cf., also, Shangsheli 尚闍梨 in the Dazhidu lun 大智度論 (Taishō no. 1509, 25.89b).
n.­928
Note that Prabhāsa is not a buddha but a king in the story in the Bhv (9.­1356).
n.­929
Siṃha is missing.
n.­930
In the preceding verses, it is not Indra but Candra who follows Candana.
n.­931
In the preceding verses, the two buddhas after Arthadarśin are Sarvārtha­siddha and Parārthadarśin, in this order.
n.­933
Ch. does not include this list of names of buddhas, whereas NBhv does. S lacks the list, too (see Yao 2012b).
n.­934
Section number 9.10.12 in BhvY (p. 454ff.). This story is related to “Section of the Tathāgata” in the Anavatapta­gāthā (kha F.316.b–317.a) and was translated into English by Hisashi Matsumura (1989b). For parallels, see Akanuma 1931, 131b. Cf., also, BAK 49 (Straube 2009, 319–22) and BAK 50 (Okano 2007).
n.­935
The text abbreviates a stock passage, which does not exist in the Bhv. The present translation is based on the corresponding stock passage in the Kṣv (da F.40.a.1–3; Fiordalis 2014): “The Buddha, the Blessed One, was staying in Kalandaka­nivāpa Bamboo Grove near Rājagṛha. The Buddha, the Blessed One, was treated with honor, looked up to, esteemed, and venerated by kings, ministers, brahmins, householders, citizens, provincial dwellers, rich men, the heads of guilds, and caravan leaders. The necessities were obtained for the Blessed One, too, namely, robes, almsfood, bedding, and medicines for the sick.” The Skt. parallel of this story in Divy 12 Prātihārya­sūtra gives a somewhat different wording (Divy 143.2–5; Rotman 2008–17, i 253–87).
n.­936
Hereafter the Gilgit manuscript survives and has been edited in Wille 1990, 69–107. See BhvY 593ff. For a detailed explanation of the preservation of the folios and preceding studies on this story and the Anavatapta­gāthā, see Salomon 2008, 18–22.
n.­937
This conversation between the Buddha and Cañcā, “One who tells … in the same way,” constitutes a verse corresponding to Uv 8.1.
n.­938
Section number 9.11 in BhvY (p. 456ff.). This part of the Bhv, which consists of verses of the Buddha and his disciples and some prose concerned with their past lives, is called Anavatapta­gāthā (AG) and has parallels in the Fo wubaidizi zishuo benqi jing 佛五百弟子自説本起經 (Taishō no. 199), the Apadāna, and the Gāndhārī Anavatapta­gāthā, which was studied in Salomon 2008. For the research history of the AG, see Salomon ibid., 18–22. Tib. has been edited and translated into French by Hofinger (1954, the chapters of disciples; 1990, the chapter of the Tathāgata). In the following notes, some other modern translations are also mentioned. Skt. (GBhv) was transliterated by Bechert (1961) and Wille (1990). The framework of the entire story of the AG and some of its episodes are borrowed by the Kaṭhināvadāna (Degener 1990, 1991; Salomon ibid., 32–33). Parts of a Mahāyāna sūtra, The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Niṣṭhā­gata­bhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta, Toh 99), echo the Anavatapta­gāthā in some respects; see 2.­24 ff. and Introduction i.­14.
n.­939
Section number 9.11.1 in BhvY (pp. 456–57).
n.­940
This sentence refers to the story of King Prabhāsa, in which the Buddha narrates how he made his first resolution for awakening (5. The Story of King Prabhāsa), and the verses the Buddha speaks for King Prasenajit and Ānanda, respectively, to explain how many former buddhas he served in his past lives (K. The Question of King Prasenajit: The Veneration of Past Buddhas and L. The Question of Ānanda or Section of Many Buddhas).
n.­941
The list of the Buddha’s acts appears in EĀc 24.5, Mv, Kṣv, and Divy 12 (see Kuan 2013, 621). The list in Ch. enumerates only nine acts, although it mentions “ten acts” at the beginning, and has some other differences from the list in Tib.: 諸佛常法出現於世、未入涅槃教化有情、必作十事。云何爲十？ 一者久植善根法王太子灌頂授記。二者未曾發心有情令彼發起無上菩提之心。三者建立三寶。四者結界。五者命壽五分之中要捨一分。六者於室羅伐城現大神通。七者於平林聚落現從天下。八者於父母所令見眞諦。九者於無熱池中共諸苾芻説業報因縁.
n.­942
This verse is translated as prose in Ch.
n.­943
Section number 9.11.2 in BhvY (p. 457ff.). The stories included in this part are not found in either the Gāndhārī Anavatapta­gāthā or Taishō no. 199.
n.­944
Section number 9.11.2.1 in BhvY (pp. 457–58). This part has a parallel in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 207–13) and KA §23. A parallel also appears in a Mahāyāna sūtra, The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Niṣṭhā­gata­bhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta, Toh 99), 2.­26 ff., in a longer passage that echoes in some respects the Anavatapta­gāthā.
n.­945
Ch. 汝應前去。我即後來. (“You should go before [me]. I will come later”).
n.­946
This phrase, “Since … will be taken,” is absent in GBhv, but is found in NBhv, Tib., and Ch.
n.­947
Section number 9.11.2.2 in BhvY (p. 459). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, L 2; German trsl. from Ch., Ji 1943, 323–24. The story has parallels in the Za piyu jing 雜譬喩經 8 (Taishō no. 205, 4.523c–524a); KA § 24, 25; a Tocharian manuscript (Pinaut 2008, 251–68; Melanie Malzahn, “A Comparative Edition of Tocharian Manuscripts,” accessed January 31, 2018‍—see A5–A10, including bibliography).
n.­948
Ch. 餘國 (“another country”).
n.­949
The present translation supplies this sentence, which is missing in Tib., on the basis of Ch. and NBhv.
n.­950
Section number 9.11.2.3 in BhvY (p. 460). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, L 3. The story has a parallel in KA §26.
n.­951
Section number 9.11.2.4 in BhvY (pp. 460–61). The story has a parallel in KA § 27 and is briefly mentioned in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 214).
n.­952
Section number 9.11.2.5 in BhvY (p. 461). The story has parallels in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 214–16) and the Liuduji jing 六度集經 82 (Taishō no. 152, 3.43c–44b). Cf., also, the second half of J 497.
n.­953
Section number 9.11.2.6 in BhvY (pp. 461–62). English trsl. from Tib., Schiefner (tr. by Ralston) 1882, L 1.
n.­954
It is unclear from this sentence who is supposed to receive the rice, “your husband” or “me.”
n.­955
GBhv gives dhyāna, vimokṣa, samādhi, and samāpatti, whereas Tib. and NBhv do not include vimokṣa. Ch. 定 (“meditation”).
n.­956
This passage tallies with a mention of “the Vinaya” in the Apidamo dapiposha lun 阿毘達磨大毘婆沙論. See Sasaki 2000, 90–91.
n.­957
Section number 9.11.3 in BhvY (p. 462ff.).
n.­958
Section number 9.11.3.1 in BhvY (pp. 462–63). Cf. Salomon 2008, 405–12 (comparative texts of Skt. and Tib.; English trsl.). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (1), 4.190a–b. The story is quoted in the Nettippakaraṇa 141.12–142.5 (Salomon 2008, 30). Whereas the verses in all the other sections in the AG are written in śloka, the verses in this section are written in various meters (Salomon ibid., 350 and 67–70). Related stories are found in the Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga: D ta F.39.b–41.a, Taishō no. 1443, 23.911b–c (Kāśyapa’s going forth); D ta F.71.b.6–73.a.5, Taishō 23.917b–c (his former life).
n.­959
In the following sections of the AG, the present translation follows Wille 1990 and Hofinger 1954 and 1990 in regard to the separation of verses that do not seem to consist of four pādas.
n.­960
Cf. 6.­221: “This General Virūḍhaka is a son of King Prasenajit of Kosala, and I too am a spiritual heir of the Blessed One” in Ānanda’s thought.
n.­961
Section number 9.11.3.2 in BhvY (pp.463–64). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (2), 4.190b–c. A related story is found in the Prjv (Skt. missing; D ka 1.333–44.a; Taishō no. 1444, 23.1029b–c).
n.­962
Tib. bang brgyugs nas (“having run”); Skt. dhāvayitvā ca cīvaram; Ch. 爲浣染. Hofinger has remarked that Tib. is based on a confusion of two different verbs, dhāv - (“wash”) and dhāv - (“run”). The present translation follows his interpretation.
n.­963
As Wille has pointed out (1990, 80), this verse, “May I be born … again and again,” has a parallel in the aforementioned story in the Prjv (fol. 9r9, PrjvVW I 305, 321; D 1.343; Taishō no. 1442, 23.1029c).
n.­964
Section number 9.11.3.3 in BhvY (pp. 464–65). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (3), 4.190c–191a. The story of Mahā­maudgalyāyana’s wish made in his past life is narrated in the Prjv (Skt. missing; D 1.353–1.360; Taishō no.1444, 23.1030a–b). The stories of his death and its cause in the past are narrated in the Kṣv (tha F.237.b ff.; Taishō no.1451, 24.287a ff.), with some differences from this section.
n.­965
Tib. bdag gis brgyugs nas de yi skra// bregs nas kyang ni chos gos dag (“I ran, shaved his hair, and [dyed] the robes”); Skt. keśān tasyāvaropyāhaṃ dhāvayitvā ca cīvaram; Ch. 即與剃鬚髮 并沐浴染衣. Cf. n.­962.
n.­966
Section number 9.11.3.4 in BhvY (pp. 465–66). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (4), 4.191a–b.
n.­967
Section number 9.11.3.5 in BhvY (pp. 466–67). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (5), 4.191b–c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 320–23. Cf., also, Salomon 2008, 36, 62–63.
n.­968
This verse has a parallel in the Nettippakaraṇa 138.1–2 (Salomon 2008, 31 and 36).
n.­969
Section number 9.11.3.6 in BhvY (p. 468). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (6), 4.191c–192a; Ap i 298 Soṇakoṭivīsa (Salomon 2008, 28–29, 64–67). Related stories are narrated in the Sbhv: SbhvG ii 134–49; D nga F.200.b–211.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.184b–187c.
n.­970
Section number 9.11.3.7 in BhvY (p. 469). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (7), 4.192a–b.
n.­971
Salomon has noted a corruption in the order of the first three verses of this chapter (Salomon 2008, 281–84): The Bhv (GBhv, Tib., and Ch.) has the verse that should be the third verse at the very start (“During the past ninety eons …”), and the Gāndhārī AG agrees with this, whereas only Taishō no. 199 shows the correct order. NBhv seems to agree with the other extant versions of the Bhv and the Gāndhārī AG in regard to the order of these verses.
n.­972
Section number 9.11.3.8 in BhvY (pp.469–70). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (8), 4.192b.
n.­973
Although Tib. is in the perfect tense (gyur), the present translation follows Skt., which is in the future tense (bhaviṣyanti). This verse may be related to an episode in which Piṇḍola­bharadvāja was ordered by the Buddha to remain living on Mount Gandhamādana until his teachings disappeared in the future: Divy 399–404; Foshuo sanmojie jing 佛説三摩竭經 (Taishō no. 129, 2.845a).
n.­974
Section number 9.11.3.9 in BhvY (pp. 470–72). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (9), 4.192b–193a. A related story is in the Vvbh (nya F.19.a ff.; Taishō no. 1442, 23.857a14ff.) and Divy 13 Svāgatāvadāna.
n.­975
Ch. 我既見斯人 心生大歡喜 雖見著弊服 而心不生厭 (“When I had seen this man, my heart engendered great joy. Despite seeing him wearing ragged clothes, my heart did not engender disgust”). Since Ch. of the next verse is similar to Tib., there is a clear discrepancy between these two verses in Ch.
n.­976
Section number 9.11.3.10 in BhvY (p. 472). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (10), 4.193a–b.
n.­977
For “seven years,” cf. the similar situation described in D. 10. Jaṅghākāśyapa (9.­1933).
n.­978
Skt. kvāthayitvāśvamūtreṇa; Ch. 以馬尿 (“with horse urine”); Tib. khyi yi gcin ni bskol ba yis (“with boiled dog urine”). Cf. Hofinger 1954, 219n2; Bechert 1961, 137n5.
n.­979
In S and the Shey Palace manuscript, none of the four summaries of contents in the AG is placed after the verses it summarizes but before them, which is the usual location for summaries of contents. See n.­882. These four summaries of contents are absent in Ch.
n.­980
Section number 9.11.4 in BhvY (p. 473ff.).
n.­981
Section number 9.11.4.1 in BhvY (pp. 473–74). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (11) 4.193b–194a. Related stories are narrated in SbhvG i 139–46; D nga F.45.b–50.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.128c–129c (Ch. lacks the story of the former life). For other parallels, see Akanuma 1931, s.v. “Yasa.”
n.­982
Section number 9.11.4.2 in BhvY (pp. 474–76). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (12), 4.194a–b; EĀc 33.2. Cf. Kuan 2013, 612.
n.­983
Cf. the sections of Rāṣṭrapāla (8. Rāṣṭrapāla) and Nanda (6. Nanda), where these characters are said to have offered parasols as the youngest and middle sons of King Kṛkin, respectively.
n.­984
Section number 9.11.4.3 in BhvY (p. 476). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (13), 4.194b–c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 297–300. Cf., also, MĀc 34 Bojuluo jing 薄拘羅經, esp. Taishō no. 26, 1.475b29–c2.
n.­985
Skt. nābhijānāmy aśaikṣo hi grahītuṃ rāṣṭra­piṇḍakam* (“As a practitioner having completed training, indeed, I did not allow myself to take the almsfood from the country”). Ch. agrees with Tib. in reading śaikṣa, “a practitioner undergoing training,” not aśaikṣa, “a practitioner having completed training.”
n.­986
Section number 9.11.4.4 in BhvY (p. 477). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (14), 4.194c–195a.
n.­987
Section number 9.11.4.5 in BhvY (p. 478). Verses in this section and part of the next section, 6. Yaśas (2), are translated with seven syllables in Ch., whereas they are written in śloka in Skt. and seven syllables in Tib., as are the other verses. The Sbhv provides the story of the three Kāśyapas’ former lives (SbhvG i 162–63; D nga F.76.a–77.a; Taishō no.1450, 24.137b–c) and their conversion (Skt. missing [cf. SbhvG i 217–31]; D nga F.55.b–67.b; Taishō 24.131a–134b). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (15), 4.195a. This section of Taishō no. 199 mentions only Uruvilvā-Kāśyapa and Nadī-Kāśyapa, and the name Gayā-Kāśyapa appears in the next section, which corresponds to the section of Yaśas in the AG.
n.­988
Section number 9.11.4.6 in BhvY (pp. 478–79). This section has a parallel in Taishō no. 199 (16), 4.195a–b. See n.­987.
n.­989
GBhv lacks this sentence.
n.­990
Two pādas of this verse are missing in GBhv (Yao 2018).
n.­991
Section number 9.11.4.7 in BhvY (pp. 480–82). Related stories are found in the Kṣv (D tha F.25.b–31.a; Taishō no. 1451, 24.215c–217b) and Divy 19 Jyotiṣkāvadāna. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (17), 4.195b–196a. For other parallels, see Hikata 1978, Appendix 25.
n.­992
Section number 9.11.4.8 in BhvY (pp. 482–83). Unlike Skt. and Tib., Ch. does not narrate Rāṣṭrapāla’s going forth. The story of Rāṣṭrapāla’s going forth is narrated in the Bhv: Chapter Seven, IV. Rāṣṭrapāla. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (18), 4.196b–c.
n.­994
Tib. yab gcig (“dear father”); GBhv tātāmbāv (“dear father and mother”); NBhv tāta mām (“dear father, [please allow] me”). Tib. seems to be closer to NBhv, which does not include a word for “mother.” However, since tāta can be used to address several persons (MW q.v.) and the protagonist does address his “two parents” in this verse, probably NBhv’s tāta should be interpreted as addressing both parents. The present translation is based on this understanding.
n.­995
dkar po’i chos dag (“white dharmas”) in this context may be synonymous with kuśalamūla (“root of merit”). Cf. SbhvG ii 257; D nga F.288.a.
n.­996
Section number 9.11.4.9 in BhvY (pp.483–85). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (19), 4.196c–197b.
n.­997
Tib. rta yi gcin. See n.­978.
n.­998
Section number 9.11.4.10 in BhvY (pp. 485–86). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (20), 4.197b–c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 295–97.
n.­999
This summary of contents exists only in Tib. The corresponding folio of the GBhv is damaged, and it is unlikely that the lost part of the folio included the summary of contents, judging from the length of the text the lost part could have accommodated.
n.­1000
The name of Sthavira is missing between Bakkula and Kāśyapa.
n.­1001
Section number 9.11.5 in BhvY (p. 486ff.).
n.­1002
Section number 9.11.5.1 in BhvY (pp. 486–87). Related stories are found in the Vvbh (D ja F.79.b–80.b; Taishō no.1442, 23.799b–c) and Divy 35 Cūḍā­pakṣāvadāna. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (21), 4.197c–198a. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 243–46.
n.­1003
In spite of this phrase, “positive and negative actions,” which does not appear in other sections of the AG, good and evil deeds are not explicitly explained in this section.
n.­1004
Section number 9.11.5.2 in BhvY (pp. 487–89). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (22), 4.198a–b. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 245.
n.­1005
Section number 9.11.5.3 in BhvY (pp. 489–90). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (23), 4.198c. For other parallels, see Kudō 2004, 274–77, 300–303; Salomon 2008, 29. A related story is found in SbhvG i 200ff.; D nga F.102.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.144b ff.
n.­1006
The above three verses, “Once when I was a poor grass-cutter … I went forth into homelessness” have parallels in MĀc 66 Shuoben jing 説本經. Cf. AKUp 4093: Honjō 2014, ii 609–12.
n.­1007
This verse, “I realized … seven times,” has a parallel in MĀc 66.
n.­1008
This verse, “Seven times here … where I had once been,” has a parallel in MĀc 66.
n.­1009
There is not a word meaning “meditation” in the Tib. The present translation is tentatively based on an understanding that the “five-factored” in this verse refers to the same thing as “the meditation consisting of five factors” in the next verse. Cf. BHSD s.v. samādhi. See, also, the parallels of these verses in Pāli (TheraG vv.916–917) and their commentaries.
n.­1010
These two verses, “I realized how beings die … through the fully purified path,” have parallels in MĀc 66.
n.­1011
These five verses, “Knowing my mind … as an untainted one,” which are absent in Taishō no. 199, have parallels in MĀc 74 Banian jing 八念經. The last two verses, “Not rejoicing at death … as an untainted one,” are also shared by MĀc 66.
n.­1012
Aniruddha is normally known as “the best of those who possess divine sight.” Cf. the Vvbh (D ja F.268.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.850b).
n.­1013
Section number 9.11.5.4 in BhvY (pp. 490–91). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (24), 4.198c–199a.
n.­1014
For this Skt. name, cf. AdhvG 102.
n.­1015
Section number 9.11.5.5 in BhvY (p. 492). A related story is in SbhvG ii 43–44; D nga F.139.b–140.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.162b–c. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (25), 4.199a–b. For other parallels, see Salomon 2008, 36.
n.­1016
This verse is available in Skt. in the Sbhv.
n.­1017
Section number 9.11.5.6 in BhvY (pp. 493–94). This section has a parallel in the Kṣv: D tha F.153.a–158.a; Taishō no. 1451, 24.260c–262a. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (26), 4.199b–c and, also, Wille 1990, 107.
n.­1019
Section number 9.11.5.7 in BhvY (pp. 494–96). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are in the Vvbh (ca F.252.a ff.; Taishō no. 1442, 23.691b ff.), with some differences from the AG.
n.­1020
Section number 9.11.5.8 in BhvY (pp. 496–97). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are in the Vvbh (D ca F.126.b ff.; Taishō no. 1442, 23.656c ff.). For other parallels, including SĀc 252, see Hikata 1978, Appendix 70.
n.­1021
Section number 9.11.5.9 in BhvY (pp. 497–99). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (27), 4.199c–200a. A related story is found in SbhvG ii 4–47; nga F.141.a–143.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.162c–163c.
n.­1022
Section number 9.11.5.10 in BhvY (pp. 499–500). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (28), 4.200a–b.
n.­1023
This summary of contents is absent in Ch. In NBhv, only part of the word “summary of contents,” uddāna, has survived the damage to the folio. It is unknown if GBhv also included the summary of contents, again because of the fragmentary state of the manuscript.
n.­1024
Section number 9.11.6 in BhvY (p. 500ff.).
n.­1025
Section number 9.11.6.1 in BhvY (pp. 500–501). Cf. Taishō no. 199 (29), 4.200b–201a. Related stories are in the Sbhv (SbhvG ii 47ff.; nga F.143.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.163c ff.) and MĀc 32 Weicengyoufa jing 未曾有法經. Cf. Deeg 2007, 46ff.
n.­1026
Section number 9.11.6.2 in BhvY (pp. 501–3). No parallel in Taishō no. 199.
n.­1027
Section number 9.11.6.3 in BhvY (pp. 504–5). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are narrated in SbhvG i 136–38; nga F.43.b–44.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.128a–b and SbhvG ii 2–4; nga F.110.a–111.b (Ch. absent).
n.­1028
Ch. 六 (“six”); Tib. (D, N, P, S) bdun (“seven”).
n.­1029
Cf. SbhvG i 135–38; D nga F.42.b–44.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.127c–128b.
n.­1030
Section number 9.11.6.4 in BhvY (pp. 505–7). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Related stories are found in the Sbhv (SbhvG i 204–211; D nga F.105.a–109.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.145b–147b).
n.­1031
These four pādas, “The maturation of karma … attained a boon,” have parallels in Skt. in the aforementioned story in the Sbhv.
n.­1032
According to Buddhist monastic custom, a monk must show respect to another monk who has been ordained longer than him, even if just by a minute. Cf. ŚavG 3–5; English translation, Schopen 2000, 101–3.
n.­1033
Section number 9.11.6.5 in BhvY (pp. 507–9). No parallel in Taishō no. 199. Ap 333 (i 269–70) gives a parallel. The end of the Section of Upālin and the beginning of the Section of Prabhākara are different from those of other sections.
n.­1034
Section number 9.11.6.6 in BhvY (pp. 509–11). No parallel in Taishō no. 199.
n.­1035
Ch. “Others just made the gesture of supplication. In the air, gods respectfully circumambulated.”
n.­1036
Section number 9.11.6.7 in BhvY (pp. 511–26). This section and the next section provide the same stories of the Buddha’s former lives in prose and verse, respectively, in different order. However, the third story of the former, c. A Young Brahmin, is not shared by the latter. Cf. Hofinger 1990 (Tibetan text and French trsl.). For the history of the formation of these sections, see Okano 2006. Parallels to the verses are found in Taishō no. 199 (30), 4.201a–202a; parallels to the verses and prose in Taishō no. 197 Foshuo xingqixing jing 仏説興起行経. Cf., also, BAK 50 (see n.­934). According to the Saṃskṛtā­saṃskṛta­viniścaya, the Sāṃmitīyas too transmitted stories of evil acts performed by the Buddha in his former lives (Namikawa 2011, 371ff.).
n.­1037
This story has a parallel in SbhvG ii 184–85; nga F.237.a; Taishō no. 1450, 24.197a–b (Panglung 1981, 53). Cf. Taishō no. 197 (7), 4.170b–c; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 226–37); KA 32 (Degener 1990, 37–38). BAK 66 provides a completely different story regarding the injury to the Buddha’s foot.
n.­1038
For this episode, see SbhvG ii 166ff.; D nga F.222.b ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.192a ff.
n.­1039
In the Sbhv, the older brother who kills the younger brother is identified with Devadatta and the younger with the Buddha.
n.­1040
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (6), 4.168a–170b; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 237–39); KA 33 (Degener 1990, 38).
n.­1041
For this episode, cf. SĀc 1289; SĀc2 287; SN 1.38. Cf., also, Lamotte 1944–80, i 508.
n.­1042
This story is related to the story of Māra and the Buddha in Sālā in the Bhv (Chapter Four, V. Sālā) and has a parallel in BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 239–41). This story is not narrated in verse.
n.­1043
The stock phrase is not abbreviated in Ch.
n.­1044
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (8), 4.170c–172a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 241–47); KA 34 (Degener 1990, 38–39).
n.­1045
Cf. Akanuma 1931, 131a, 662b; Hofinger 1990, 91n2, 99n1.
n.­1046
From this point GBhv (fol. 218ff.) is available.
n.­1047
For this phrase, see n.­541.
n.­1048
The stock phrase is not abbreviated in Ch.
n.­1049
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (2), 4.166a–c; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 247).
n.­1050
A similar story is found in SbhvG i 22ff.; ga F.267.a ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.102b ff. (Panglung 1981, 55), with some differences. There, however, the story is not related to the Buddha’s former life. Cf. Taishō no. 197 (1), 4.164b–166a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 247–76).
n.­1051
Tib. thun mong du yod pas; Skt. mahatī velā vartate; Ch. 時將稍過. The present translation follows Skt. (cf. Sbhv Tib. nam tshod ring du yod pas).
n.­1052
Tib. sta gon ma bgyis te; Skt. nāsāv asajjā (ms. nasāv asajjā; Sbhv nāsāv asajjā). The present translation follows Skt.
n.­1053
This story has already been narrated in the Bhv (Chapter Eight, V. Vairambhya, D. A Brahmin Who Abused the Buddha Vipaśyin). Cf. Taishō no. 197 (9), 4.172a–c; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 277–79).
n.­1054
According to Skt. and Ch. (see n.­1055), this story corresponds to the Nandīpālasūtra in the Rājasaṃyuktakanipāta of the Madhyamāgama, which is parallel with MĀc 63 Bingpolingqi jing 鞞婆陵耆経 and MN 81 Ghaṭikārasutta. The Sbhv also includes a parallel (SbhvG ii 22.1–30.22; nga F.124.b–131.b; Taishō no. 1450, 24.156c–158c). Cf. Yao 2012a, 3.2.38. For comparative studies, see Anālayo 2010, 71–84; 2011a, i 441–51; 2012a, 155–74. Note, however, that in these works the Bhv version of the story (Tib.) is erroneously connected to the Sbhv version (Skt.). Cf., also, Taishō no. 197 (10), 4.172c–174b; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 279–81) and SĀc 595 (Taishō no. 99, 2.159c); SĀc2 189 (Taishō no. 100, 2.442c); SN 1.5.10; SN 2.3.4; Tocharian fragments (Ogihara 2016a; 2016b).
n.­1055
Here GBhv, NBhv, and Ch. abbreviate most of the story of Nandīpāla and Uttara, referring to its source: nandīpāla­sūtraṃ vistareṇa yathā madhyamāgame rāja­saṃyuktaka­nipāte (219v5); 廣如中阿笈摩王法相應品中説.
n.­1056
The meaning of Tib. lo ma dang gtun spangs pa; Skt. (Sbhv) nikṣipta­parṇa­musalo “had abandoned leaves and pestles” is unclear to the present translator. Hofinger suggests that this phrase should be interpreted in the light of a parallel in the Chinese translation of the Madhyamāgama (MĀc 63), which reads huaqiao 鏵鍬 “shovel and hoe” (i.e., farming labor) for “leaves and pestles” (Hofinger 1990, 103n7).
n.­1057
Tib. byi brun (“mouse excrement”); Sbhv mūṣikotkira. Cf. BHSD mūṣī.
n.­1058
Tib. byang gi sgra mi snyan gyi dus byin gyis brlabs nas; Sbhv uttara­kauravaṃ samayam adhiṣṭhāya. Schopen quotes a passage from the Muktaka of the Ug, where this phrase is used regarding an exceptional permission to take fruits from a tree, and remarks, “The greatest obscurity, however, must surely be the phrase byang phyogs kyi dus su bsngos te, translated here by ‘fancying himself for the time in the north.’ Without being able to explain the phrasing here, this has been taken to be an allusion to the northern ‘mythical’ continent of Uttarakuru, a land of abundance where planting and cultivation were unknown and food was there for the taking. But even with these difficulties the basic sense of the text seems clear enough: monks are normally forbidden to take or eat what has not been explicitly given or rendered ‘proper’ or suitable …” (2018, 382–83). The example here in the Bhv is somewhat similar to that in the Muktaka in being concerned with taking food that is not put in one’s bowl by others, even though Nandīpāla’s parents do say, “Please help yourself.” Since it is said in Vinaya texts that there is no possession of anything in Uttarakuru and consequently no stealing (Kishino 2017, esp. 242–43), deciding that it is “the time of Kuru in the north” may mean deciding that one is in some exceptional situation in which one is exempted from the sin of theft in regard to taking food by oneself.
n.­1059
The following verses have already been seen in the story of Ambhāṣṭha in the Bhv (6.­165).
n.­1062
Tib. byang chub kyi snying por (*bodhimaṇḍe); Skt. bodhimūle. Either way, as Okano has pointed out (2007, 280), this does not tally with the Buddha’s biographies.
n.­1063
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (4), 4.167a–b; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 281–89).
n.­1064
Hereafter, two folios are missing in GBhv (fols. 220–21).
n.­1065
A related story is narrated in the Kṣv, where the story of the massacre of the Śākyans is narrated (tha F.95.a–b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.242a–b). Cf. Taishō no. 197 (3), 4.166c–167a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 289–90). Cf., also, the final part of EĀc 34.2 (Taishō no. 125, 2.693b–c).
n.­1066
Cf. Taishō no. 197 (5), 4.167c–168a; BAK 50 (Okano 2007, 290–92).
n.­1067
Section number 9.11.6.8 in BhvY (pp. 527–30). Cf. Okano 2007, appendix (Japanese trsl. from Tib.). This section is absent in Ch. Although the stories narrated in the previous section are given here in verse, the story of the young brahmin who abused a self-awakened one (7. Sugata [prose] c. A Young Brahmin) is missing. Cf. Taishō no. 199 (30), 4.201a–202a, with the stories in the same order; Ap 299–301 (Salomon 2008, 28–29).
n.­1068
As Okano has pointed out (2006, 89), Devadatta is not mentioned in the prose version of this story in the AG.
n.­1069
For the donation of this “former park” by Viśākhā, see the Cīv, GM ii 70; ga F.79b.
n.­1070
The meaning of the last part of this sentence, ’on kyang dge ’dun gyi ched du yon ma phul lo, is not entirely clear to the present translator. The word yon, translated here as “any gift,” might translate argha, which means some kind of offering to honored guests (cf. Schopen [2005b] 2014, 401n35; Kishino 2013, 461–62). Ch. 不請世尊説施伽他 “She did not ask the Blessed One to speak gāthās (verses) on offerings.” In Ch., the incomplete Chapter on Medicines ends here without any indication of the loss of text.
n.­1071
Hereafter the Gilgit manuscript survives.
n.­1072
This verse has a parallel in Uv 16.4.
n.­1073
The following story of Vairaṭṭasiṃha is briefly mentioned in the Tib. version of the Muktaka in the Ug (pa F.160.b), whereas it is not mentioned in the Chinese version of the same section (Taishō no. 1452, 24.440c).
n.­1074
Since permission to eat guḍa at times other than mealtimes was already implied in the regulations on guḍa in an earlier part of the Bhv (VII. Revata), the reason for the appearance of this authorization here is unclear.
n.­1075
There is a parallel story in BAK 90 (Panglung 1981, 57–58). There is also a Tocharian fragment of another parallel (Ogihara 2015b, 302).
n.­1076
Skt: “… to experience divine and human prosperity and to see the truth in the presence of the Blessed One?”
n.­1077
It is unknown if GBhv included this uddāna due to damage to the folio.
n.­1078
For the following explanations, cf. Yijing’s Nanhai jiqui neifa zhuan 南海寄歸内法傳, Taishō no. 2125, 54.216c–217a; his translation of the Ekottara­karma­śataka, Taishō no. 1453, 24.494c–495a. Cf., also, Yamagiwa 2001, 320–22; Silk 2008, 246–47.
n.­1079
Tib. dge slong lag gi blas; Skt. nava­karmika­bhikṣu. Cf. Silk 2008, 75–99; Kieffer-Pülz 2010, 77–78.
n.­1080
The following instructions on how to demarcate a place for what is allowable are similar to the instructions on how to demarcate a place for the poṣadha ceremony in the Poṣadhavastu (Poṣv 298–303).
n.­1081
The text repeats the phrase “all forms of which are well fixed, which is within the boundary, and which has a fathom of space outside” in full. The same applies in the following formulas.
n.­1083
See previous note, n.­1081.
n.­1086
This is the conditioned cancellation of the rule established in Chapter 2, IV. One Who Has a Wind Illness, which prohibits cooking or keeping food overnight within the boundary of the community.
n.­1087
For the three kinds of allowable meat, see Shimoda 1997, 401–4, 668–69.
n.­1088
Tib. zhal tshus (non-honorific form: g.yal tshus); Skt. prātarāśika/prātarāśā (cf. 8.­160, 8.­166). In the Vvbh, monks are permitted to have zhal tshus/xiaoshi 小食 when they are sick or tired from labor or travel Vvbh (D ja F.124.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.815a). According to Yijing, the Chinese translator, it was permitted to have xiaoshi in a monastery before the main meal in the morning (Taishō no. 2125, 54.222a, 223b. Cf. also, Hirakawa 1993–95, iii 499–501), and a similar custom is seen in other vinayas, too (Sasaki 1999, 270n53).
n.­1089
It is unclear to the present translator what the word khādyaka indicates. Although its Tib. translation bca’ ba, “what is to be chewed,” is also used as a translation for another word, khādanīya, there is a difference in usage between khādanīya and khādyaka, at least in the part where Skt. is available: the former always appears together with the word bhojanīya, whereas the latter appears independently.
n.­1090
Skt. auttarāpathikāni (“of the northern country”).
n.­1091
Monks are prohibited from eating after the main meal (Vvbh D ja F.141.a–149.a; Taishō no. 1442, 23.821a–822c). For this rule, see Hirakawa 1993–95, iii 387–402.
n.­1092
Cf. Vvbh (D ja F.156.b; Taishō no. 1442, 23.826a).
n.­1093
(1) rgun ’brum (Skt. mṛdvīkā), (2) bal po se’u (dāḍima), (3) ’bra go, (4) sta rga (akṣoṭa), (5) yon tshe (vātāma), (6) shing tog u ra ma na, (7) shing tog ku (D u) ru ma yi ka, (8) shing tog ni ko tsa, (9) shing tog ba bhu, (10) shing tog sin tsi ka. The corresponding part is lost in both Skt. manuscripts, and the Skt. terms provided in the present translation are only tentative, except the first and the third, which have already appeared in the Bhv (1.­12), the second, which is confirmed in Mvy 4211, and the fourth, for which the meanings in Skt. in the VS and in Tib. coincide. Cf. VS § 8 Bhaiṣajya­vastu, 203 tadyathā drākṣyadāḍima­kharjūrākṣoṣṭau vātāma urumāna­rāmāpikā­kurumāyikā­nikocobabhūḥ piñcitikā­puṣkarañ ca tadākhyam.
n.­1095
This elephant, Dhanapālaka, appears in the Sbhv, where its conversion by the Buddha is narrated (SbhvG ii 186ff.; nga F.238.a ff.; Taishō 1450, 24.197b ff.).
n.­1096
Cf. the Pāli Jātaka, which gives an explanation very different from the two in the Bhv: When the elephant, which was originally named Nārāgiri, was converted by the Buddha, people threw ornaments on its body, and as its body was covered with the ornaments, it was named Dhanapālaka (J v 336–37).
n.­1097
The story of Miṇḍhaka and his family and the story of their former lives have parallels in Divy 9 Meṇḍhaka­gṛha­pati­vibhūti­pariccheda and Divy 10 Meṇḍhakāvadāna and other vinayas (see Hiraoka 2007, i 235–56. For Eng. trsl., see Rotman 2008–17, i 223–41). The Bhv’s Miṇḍhaka stories are generally briefer than the Divy’s Meṇḍhaka stories.
n.­1098
Skt. śatāni sahasrāṇi ca; Tib. brgya stong (“a hundred thousand”). Cf. brgya ’am stong in the wish Miṇḍhaka’s wife made in her former life (10.­126). The same applies to Miṇḍhaka’s daughter-in-law.
n.­1099
For this greeting, see n.­389.
n.­1100
Tib. shes ldan dag bltas zin gyis ’gro’o (lit., “Because [we] have seen [you], sirs, [we] will leave”); Skt. avalokitā bhavata: gamiṣyāmah. It seems Tib. (or the Skt. manuscript Tib. was based on) confused bhavata, imp. 2nd pl. of √bhū, with bhavantaḥ, nom./voc. pl. of bhavat. For the farewell phrase consisting of pp., nom. of ava√loc, and imp. of √bhū (in the Bhv, e.g., 8.­199; 152r avalokito bhava), see BHSD s.v. avalokayati.
n.­1101
bcom ldan ’das de ’jig rten thams cad med pa’i yul stong rgyu zhing gshegs par bya ’am (lit., “Should that Blessed One travel in an empty country where no worldly beings exist”). The present translation is partially based on the Divy: sa nāma bhagavān sarva­loka­prativiśiṣṭaḥ sarva­vāda­vijayī śūnye jana­pade cārikaṃ cariṣyati.
n.­1102
Tib. ’khor de rnams zil gyis mnan te; Skt. tāṃ parṣadam abhya­vagāhya (“having gone into that assembly”) (SWTF s.v. abhyavagāh-). Cf. Hiraoka 2007, i 252n47.
n.­1103
This list of foods partially overlaps with those of “medicines to be consumed at night” and “medicines to be consumed within seven days” (see 1.­9). Ghee (Tib. mar; Skt. ghṛta) may be the same as sarpis, which is one of the “medicines to be consumed within seven days” (cf. Einoo 1988, 26–27n169 for ājya, ghṛta, and sarpis as synonyms in the Śrautasūtra). Thickened juice of the sugarcane (Tib. bu ram; Skt. guḍa) is, according to the Vvbh, the same as phāṇita, which is also included among “medicines to be consumed within seven days” (see n.­35). Khaṇḍa, which does not appear either in Skt. or in the Divy, is a tentative reconstruction from Tib. hwags based on Mvy 5838. Śarkarā is also one of the “medicines to be consumed within seven days.” “Drinks” (Tib. btung ba; Skt. pānaka) correspond to “medicines to be consumed at night.”
n.­1105
Although this sentence continues until the first part of the next episode in Tib. (… gshegs pa na khyim bdag lug gis gsol pa “when [the Blessed One] … departed, the householder Miṇḍhaka said…”), the sentence stops here in Skt. Divy 9 ends here. The following two episodes do not exist in the Divy, and E. The Former Lives of the Miṇḍhaka Family corresponds to Divy 10.
n.­1106
Kalpikāra. For this term, see Clarke 2009, 27n86.
n.­1107
The rules of training for novices appear in a part of the Prjv (1.405) for which Skt. is missing. In Ch., the rules are abbreviated in the Prjv (Taishō no. 1444, 23.1030c2–3), but they are found in the Ekottara­karma­śataka (Taishō no. 1453, 24.456b–c).
n.­1108
Cf. Schopen [2004b] 2014, 346, 357n50.
n.­1109
Preceding this sentence, Skt. has the sentence śrāmaṇerako nāsti (230r4), “There was no novice,” which is omitted in Dutt’s edition.
n.­1110
Cf. the procedure for taking formal possession of medicines to be consumed throughout one’s life (1.­22).
n.­1111
Cf. VS 8.9, 8.10.
n.­1112
This episode corresponds to Divy 10 Meṇḍhakāvadāna and a folio of an avadāna manuscript from Gilgit (Kudō 2017, xxxii; Plate 43).
n.­1113
The Divy and the avadāna from Gilgit do not abbreviate this verse.
n.­1114
The Divy and the avadāna from Gilgit give a stock phrase about a peaceful kingdom, whereas in the Bhv, GBhv abbreviates it with the phrase pūrvavad yāvat “as before” and Tib. does not have any trace of the stock phrase.
n.­1115
Tib. (1) za ma tog, (2) rus gong dkar po, (3) thur mas ’tsho ba; Skt. (1) cañca (Divy cañcu), (2) śvetāsthi, (3) śalākāvṛtti. Cf. AKBh 188.6–15.
n.­1116
This sentence does not tally with the preceding part of the story, where only a famine of “living by means of a stick” is said to occur.
n.­1117
This stock phrase is not abbreviated but given in full in GBhv, whereas it is abbreviated in NBhv and Tib.
n.­1118
The text repeats “from my serving a man who is truly worthy of offerings” as it appears in Miṇḍhaka’s words. The same applies in the following words of the other family members.
n.­1119
The text repeats “Having attained such qualities, may I please a teacher who is even nobler than this man and not displease him!” as it appears in Miṇḍhaka’s words. The same applies in the following words of the other family members.
n.­1120
Skt. balavatī āśā tato ’sau gṛha­patiẖ kośa­koṣṭhāgārāṇi pratya­vekṣitum ārabdho … (231v2) “(Hope is powerful.) Then this householder began to look at his warehouses and storehouses . . . .”
n.­1122
Skt. from here to the end of I. A. 3. Kaineya Offers Drinks to the Blessed One is edited in Chung and Wille 2002, 119–24.
n.­1123
Tib. ke na’i bu yis btud ba blangs (lit., “Drinks were received by Kaineya”); Skt. kaineyapānam ādāya (Chung and Wille 2002, 119 reads kaineya<ḥ> pānam). Tib. seems problematic because, in the following story, Kaineya is not the recipient of the drink but the donor. Skt. might be translated “Having received Kaineya’s drink (i.e., the drink offered by Kaineya).” Hence the present translation, which supplies the word “offered.” Among the eleven uddānas in the Bhv, only this final uddāna includes gerund phrases in Skt., “…ādāya” and “… kṛtvā” (see the note after next), whereas the others simply list nouns.
n.­1124
Tib. ka shi’i tshong rdal nas thug; Skt. kāśipaṭṭaṃ ca yavāgvā (“cloth from Kāśi, by barley porridge”). Edgerton suggests that paṭṭa is an error for paṭṭana (“city”) (BHSD s.v. paṭṭa). Cf. Mvy 5531: tshong rdal = pattana.
n.­1125
Tib. sdig can du ni bca’ ba dang; Skt. pāpāyāṃ khādyakaṃ kṛtvā (“having made khādyaka in Pāpā”). Cf. n.­1089.
n.­1126
This story has a parallel in MN 92 Selasutta (= Sn 3.7), etc. Cf. Anālayo 2011a, ii 545–49 and Yao 2012, 3.2.39. Kōgen Mizuno identified the story in the Bhv with Śailagāthā, a title included in the list of texts to be recited in times of danger which appears several times in the Mūla­sarvāstivādin literature (Mizuno 1992, 23–24). Cf. 2.­198 and n.­73. For a parallel in EĀ 49.6, see Anālayo [2011b] 2016b, 325–43. Cf., also, BAK 77 (Okano 2010, 62ff.), Merv-av 210ff., Karmaśataka 34 (See “The Story of Kaineya” in Jamspal and Fischer, trans. The Hundred Deeds, Toh 340).
n.­1127
This episode is discussed in the Apidamo dapiposha lun 阿毘達磨大毘婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1545, 27.410a5ff.).
n.­1128
Tib. lngas rtsen. The translation of this name here is different from that at 8.­114, lnga len.
n.­1129
Following this sentence, Skt. has this sentence: mā kaścid ojo ghaṭṭayiṣyati (“None should disturb your vitality”).
n.­1130
Tib. dbus pa’i rigs; Skt. āryajātīya (“belonging to the tribe of ārya”).
n.­1131
Tib. mtha’ ’khob pa’i rigs; Skt. dasyujātīya (“belonging to the tribe of dasyu (barbarians)”).
n.­1132
Tib. dbus pa’i tshig gis; Skt. āryayā vācā (“in the language of āryas”).
n.­1133
Tib. mtha’ ’khob pa’i tshig gis; Skt. dasyuvācā (“in the language of dasyus”).
n.­1134
This episode, the Buddha’s sermon in the languages of āryas and others to the Four Great Kings, has parallels in the Shisong lü 十誦律 (Taishō no. 1435, 23.193a) and the Apidamo dapiposha lun 阿毘達磨大毘婆沙論 (Taishō no. 1545, 27.410a), etc. (Yamada 1959, 478–84; Lamotte 1958, 607–10 [Eng. 1988: 549–52]). Although each of the four sermons is in prose in the Bhv, they appear in succession in the Uv. Lambert Schmithausen has pointed out that the Apidamo dapiposha lun in its prose part of the episode corresponds to the Shisong lü, whereas it is closer to the Bhv in the part corresponding to the Uv (Schmithausen 1987, 315–17).
n.­1135
Cf. Uv 26.16.
n.­1136
Cf. Uv 26.17.
n.­1137
In the parallels in Apidamo dapiposha lun and other texts (see above), the language of this phrase is said to be of the Draviḍas, inhabitants of the east coast of the Deccan.
n.­1138
Cf. Uv 26.18.
n.­1139
GBhv has “kumbhāṇḍas” instead of “nāgas,” probably confusing this part of the story with the preceding part, which is concerned with Virūḍhaka and his attendants.
n.­1140
In this part, GBhv erroneously repeats the preceding part concerned with Virūpākṣa (Chung and Wille 2002, 121n99), whereas NBhv correctly names Vaiśravaṇa.
n.­1141
In the parallels in Apidamo dapiposha lun and other texts (see above), the language of this phrase is said to be of the Mlecchas. The word mleccha generally means “a foreigner, barbarian,” whose regional specification is unknown.
n.­1142
Cf. Uv 26.19.
n.­1144
This story has a parallel in Merv-av 210–13. Cf., also, SHT X 3827.
n.­1145
For the story of Uttara, see g. Uttara. Cf., also, Yao 2017, 138.
n.­1146
This list of the eight kinds of drinks corresponds to that at 1.­11, with the order of the seventh and eighth reversed.
n.­1147
Skt. “If these eight kinds of drinks have been accepted at the appropriate time, squeezed at an inappropriate time, and strained at an inappropriate time, and if their formal possession has been taken at an inappropriate time, they should not be consumed after a meal. If these eight kinds of drinks have been accepted at the appropriate time, squeezed at the appropriate time, and strained at the appropriate time, and if their formal possession has been taken at an inappropriate time, they should not be consumed. If these eight kinds of drinks have been accepted at the appropriate time, squeezed at the appropriate time, and strained at the appropriate time, and if their formal possession has been taken at an inappropriate time, they should not be consumed (the same as the preceding sentence). If these eight kinds of drinks have been squeezed at an inappropriate time and strained at an inappropriate time, they should not be consumed after a meal. They should not be consumed after the first watch of the night has passed, either.”
n.­1149
Cf. a similar passage in 2.­200.
n.­1150
In MN 92, Keniya (Kaineya) is not said to become a monk. The verse part following this prose part (B. The Conversion of Kaineya and Śaila (Verse)) does not mention Kaineya’s going forth, either.
n.­1151
Skt. (GBhv; NBhv) “the fruit of a never-returner.”
n.­1152
Skt. (GBhv) “the fruit of a never-returner.” The corresponding sentence is not extant in NBhv.
n.­1153
Cf. Mizuno 1992; Yao 2012a, 3.2.39.
n.­1154
This verse and the following two verses have parallels in SĀc 100 in a different context (Enomoto 1991–94, 2) and in a quotation of the sūtra in AKUp 1001. Cf. Skilling and Harrison 2005.
n.­1155
This verse refers to the Buddha’s first sermon after his awakening. Cf. nga F.38.a.4ff.; SbhvG i 135.1ff.; Taishō no. 1450, 24.126a ff.
n.­1156
Tib. tshal sdug yid du ’ong ba de // gang na ba ni bram ze’i chos; Skt. gaccha brāhmaṇa tenedaṃ vanaṣaṇḍaṃ manoramam. The present translation is based on Skt.
n.­1157
This is one of the Buddha’s thirty-two marks (cf. Mvy 255).
n.­1158
This is one of the Buddha’s thirty-two marks (cf. Mvy 248).
n.­1159
This is one of the Buddha’s thirty-two marks (cf. AKUp 3024; MĀc 59).
n.­1160
Skt. “the descendant of Aṅgiras (an ancient ṛṣi).”
n.­1161
This verse and the following two verses have parallels in MĀc 161 Fanmo jing 梵摩經. Cf., also, 6.­151.
n.­1162
Skt. śramaṇas.
n.­1163
Here and in the following, the seven limbs of awakening are compared to the seven treasures of a wheel-turning king.
n.­1164
Skt. “…carries a load.”
n.­1165
Skt. “And also, my four groups of followers are my army consisting of four divisions.”
n.­1166
Skt. “Practicing the path is a battle.”
n.­1167
Skt. “I, who am awakened, awaken beings.”
n.­1168
Skt. “I remain among those who are perplexed.”
n.­1169
Skt. “I will remove your uncertainties.”
n.­1170
This verse has a parallel in MĀc 161 Fanmo jing 梵摩經. See Chung and Fukita 2011, 141n32.
n.­1171
Tib. dga’ yod gnas brtan ka pi na; Skt. “the elder Brāhmaṇa­kapphiṇa.”
n.­1172
Skt. nadī­sundarikātīre “on the bank of the Sundarikā river.” This name of the river does not tally with the prose part, as Edgerton has pointed out: BHSD s.v. Sundarikā.
n.­1173
Tib. ka shi’i tshong rdal; Skt. Kāśipaṭṭa. BHSD 316b mentions the possibility that paṭṭa here in the Bhv is a misspelling of paṭṭana (a city). Cf. Mvy 5531: tshong rdal, pattana (a town).
n.­1174
Tib. ’dreg mkhan; Skt. śobhitapūrviṇo (“ones who originally had śobhita”). The present translator has not located the meaning “barber” for the word śobhita, which normally either means “beautiful, adorned” as an adjective or is the name of a disciple of the Buddha (cf. 278.b–288.a). According to Mvy 9050, ’dreg mkhan is a translation of nāpita.
n.­1175
Tib. pha; Skt. sālohita (“kinsman”).
n.­1176
Skt. reads either yavāgupāna or yavāgu where Tib. has nas thug.
n.­1177
The relationship between barley porridge (nas thug; yavāgu) and rice soup (thug pa; peyā) is not clear to the present translator.
n.­1178
Cf., VS 17.437, which is based on this rule. In the Kṣv, a similar rule to this, the prohibition against having instruments monks used to use before going forth, is established on the basis of a different story (Kṣv da F.107.a–b; Taishō no. 1451, 24.245c–246a). There, the exceptions are a former physician’s knife/needle, a former scribe’s ink bottle, and a former barber’s razor/nail cutter. Cf., also, Kṣv tha F.201.a–b; Taishō no.1451, 24. 275a, where giving a haircut and keeping instruments for that purpose are permitted.
n.­1179
The phrase “the Mallas in Pāpā” is missing in Tib. The present translation follows Skt.
n.­1180
This conversation between Ānanda and Roca looks somewhat strange in the context of the story, where the fine is supposed to be imposed on someone who invites the Buddha and the community by himself, not someone who does not join others who have invited the Buddha. In the parallel story in the Pāli Vinaya, the fine is meant for someone who does not go to meet the Buddha (yo bhagavato paccuggamanaṃ na karissati pañca satāni daṇḍo’ti. Vin i 247.6–7), which better fits Roca’s words.
n.­1182
Skt. lacks “ ‘We do not permit it,’ those who were pious said.”
n.­1183
Tib: gyad sna chen po la gtogs pa ’od ldan gyis bdag cag bslus lags; Skt: vyaṃsitā vayaṃ rocena malla­mahā­mātreṇa. A similar phrase is found at 3.­247, where the Licchavis are preempted by Āmrapālī in offering a meal to the Buddha.
n.­1184
This episode corresponds to the Mahā­māyūrī­vidyārājñī and some other texts. Cf. Pathak 1989; Yao 2012b, 3.2.40. For a related passage in the Muktaka in the Ug, see Kishino 2016, 237, 243 (§1.10.2).
n.­1185
The text of the mantra is based on Skt.
n.­1186
S phan pa; D sman pa.
b.

Bibliography

ched du brjod pa’i tshoms (Udāna­varga). Toh 326, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa), folios 209.a–253.a. English translation in Champa Thupten Zongtse (1990).

sman gyi gzhi (Bhaiṣajya­vastu). Toh 1, ch. 6, Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 277.b–311.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–317.a; and vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.a–50.a.

sman gyi gzhi. bka’ ’gyur (dpe bsdur ma) [Comparative Edition of the Kangyur], krung go’i bod rig pa zhib ’jug ste gnas kyi bka’ bstan dpe sdur khang (The Tibetan Tripitaka Collation Bureau of the China Tibetology Research Center). 108 volumes. Beijing: krung go’i bod rig pa dpe skrun khang (China Tibetology Publishing House), 2006–2009, vol. 1, pp. 644–721, vol. 2, pp. 3–745, vol. 3, pp. 3–117.

man gyi gzhi (Bhaiṣajya­vastu). Stok no. 1, ch. 6, Stok Palace Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 396.b–455.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–444.a; and vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.b–56.b.

Bhaiṣajya­vastu in the Gilgit manuscripts. Dutt 1942–50, pt. 1 (1947).

Genben shuoyiqieyoubu pinaiye yaoshi 根本説一切有部毘奈耶藥事, Taishō no. 1448, 24.1a1–97a24.

1. A Work Referred to in the Bhaiṣajyavastu

yang dag par ldan pa’i lung (Saṃyuktāgama). Not included in the Kangyur. Cf. Za ahan jing 雜阿含經, Taishō no. 99, 2.1a1–373b18.

2. Works Related to the Bhaiṣajyavastu

’dul ba gzhi (Vinayavastu). Toh 1, 17 chaps. Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 1.a1–311.a; vol. 2 (’dul ba, kha), folios 1.a–317.a; vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 1.a–293.a; and vol. 4 (’dul ba, nga), folios 1.a–302.a5.

’dul ba rnam par ’byed pa (Vinayavibhaṅga). Toh 3, Degé Kangyur vol. 5 (’dul ba, ca), folios 21.a1–292.a; vol. 6 (’dul ba, cha) folios 1.a–287.a; vol. 7 (’dul ba, ja) folios 1.a–287.a; and vol. 8 (’dul ba, nya) folios 1.a–269.a6.

’dul ba phran tshegs kyi gzhi (Vinaya­kṣudraka­vastu). Toh 6, Degé Kangyur vol. 10 (’dul ba, tha), folios 1.a1–310.a; vol. 11 (’dul ba, da), folios 1.a–333.a7.

’dul ba gzhung bla ma (Vinayottara­grantha). Toh 7, Degé Kangyur vol. 12 (’dul ba, na), folios 1.a1–302.a; vol. 13 (’dul ba, pa) 1.a–313.a5.

ko lpags kyi gzhi (Carmavastu). Toh 1-5, Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 251.a–277.b.

dge slong ma’i ’dul ba rnam par ’byed pa (Bhikṣuṇī­vinaya­vibhaṅga). Toh 5, Degé Kangyur vol. 9 (’dul ba, ta), folios 25.b–328.a.

dge ’dun gyi dbyen gyi gzhi (Saṅgha­bheda­vastu). Toh 1, ch. 17, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 255.b–293.a; vol. 4 (’dul ba, nga), folios 1.a–302.a.

gos kyi gzhi (Cīvaravastu). Toh 1-7, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 50.a–115.b.

rgya cher rol pa (Lalita­vistara). Toh 95, Degé Kangyur vol. 46 (mdo sde, kha), folios 1.b–216.b. English translation in the Dharmachakra Translation Committee (2013).

’dul ba gzhung dam pa (Vinayottara­grantha). Toh 7a, Degé Kangyur vol. 12 (’dul ba, na), folios 92.b–302.a; vol. 13 (’dul ba, pa), folios 1.b–313.a.

’dul ba’i mdo (Vinayasūtra). Toh 4117, Degé Tengyur vol. 261 (’dul ba, wu) folios 1.a1–100.a7.

don rnam par nges pa chos kyi rnam grangs (Arthaviniścaya­dharma­paryāya). Toh 317, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa), folios 170.b–188.a. English translation in Dharmachakra Translation Committee 2021.

gnas lam gyi gzhi (Śayanāsana­vastu). Toh 1-15, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 187.a–222.a.

bye brag tu rtogs par byed pa chen po (Mahāvyutpatti). Toh 4346, Degé Tengyur vol. 204 (sna tshogs, co), folios 1.b–131.a.

ma ga d+hA bzang mo’i rtogs pa brjod pa (Sumāgadhāvadāna). Toh 346, vol. 75 (mdo sde, aM), folios 291.b–298.a. English translation The Exemplary Tale of Sumāgadhā 2024.

dmar ser can gyi gzhi (Pāṇḍulohitaka­vastu). Toh 1-11, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 140.a–165.b.

rtsod pa’i gzhi (Adhikaraṇa­vastu). Toh 1-16, Degé Kangyur vol. 3 (’dul ba, ga), folios 222.a–255.b.

mdzangs blun zhes bya ba’i mdo (Damamūkasūtra). Toh 341, vol. 74 (mdo sde, a), folios 129.a–298.a.

gzhang ’brum rab tu zhi bar byed pa’i mdo (Arśapraśamana­sūtra). Toh 621, Degé Kangyur vol. 91 (rgyud, ba), folios 61.a–61.b; Toh 1020, vol. 101 (gzungs, waM), folios 181.b–183.a.

yangs pa’i grong khyer du ’jug pa’i mdo chen po (Vaiśālī­praveśa­mahā­sūtra). Toh 312, Degé Kangyur vol. 72 (mdo sde, sa) folios 157.b–161.b. English translation in the Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team (2020).

yongs su mya ngan las ’das pa chen po’i mdo. Toh 119, Degé Kangyur vol. 52 (mdo sde, nya), folios 1.b–343.a; vol. 53 (mdo sde, ta), folios 1.b–339.a.

rab tu ’byung ba’ gzhi (Pravrjyāvastu). Toh 1, chap. 1. Degé Kangyur vol. 1 (’dul ba, ka), folios 1.a–131.a. English translation in Miller (2018).

rig sngags kyi rgyal mo rma bya chen mo (Mahā­māyūrī­vidyā­rājñi). Toh 559, Degé Kangyur, vol. 90 (rgyud ’bum, pha), folios 87.b–117.a. English translation in Dharmachakra Translation Committee 2023.

las brgya pa (Karmaśataka). Toh 340, Degé Kangyur vol. 73 (mdo sde, ha), folios 1.b–309.a; vol. 74 (mdo sde, a), folios 1.b–128.b. English translation in Jamspal and Fischer 2020.

gsang sngags kyi rjes su ’brang ba chen mo’i sgrub thabs (Mahā­mantrānusāriṇī­sādhana). Toh 3254, Degé Tengyur vol. 76 (rgyud, bu), folio 15.b.

so sor thar pa’i mdo (Prātimokṣa­sūtra). Toh 2, Degé Kangyur vol. 5 (’dul ba, ca), folios 1.a–20.b.

Kalyāṇamitra. lung phran tshegs kyi rnam par bshad pa (Āgama­kṣudraka­vyākhyāna). Toh 4115, Degé Tengyur vol. 158 (’dul ba, dzu), folios 1.b–232.a.

Śamathadeva. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi ’grel bshad nye bar mkho ba (Abhidharma­kośa­ṭīkopāyikā). Toh 4094, Degé Tengyur vol. 146 (mngon pa, ja), folios 1.b–287.a; vol 147 (mngon pa, ngu), folios 1.b–95.a.

Vasubandhu. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi bshad pa (Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya). Toh 4090, Degé Tengyur vol. 140 (mngon pa, ku), folios 26.b–258.a; vol. 141 (mngon pa, khu), folios 1.b–95.a.

Vasubandhu. rnam par bshad pa’i rigs pa (Vyākhyāyukti). Toh 4061, Degé Tengyur vol. 136 (sems tsam, shi), folios 29.a–134.b.

Yaśomitra. chos mngon pa’i mdzod kyi ’grel bshad (Abhidharma­kośa­ṭīkā). Toh 4092, Degé Tengyur vol. 142 (mngon pa, gu), folios 1.b–330.a; vol. 143 (mngon pa, ngu), folios 1.b–333.a.

3. Works Referred to in the Introduction, Notes, etc.

Akanuma, Chizen 赤沼 智善. Indo bukkyō koyū meishi jiten 印度佛教固有名詞辭典 [“A dictionary of proper names of Indian Buddhism”]. Nagoya: Hajinkaku shobō, 1931. Reprint, Kyoto: Hōzōkan 法藏館, 1967.

Anālayo (2007). “Mindfulness of Breathing in the Saṃyukta-āgama.” Buddhist Studies Review 24, no.2: 137–50. Reprint, 2015: 333–45.

Anālayo (2008). “Rebirth and the Gandhabba.” Mahachulalongkornrajavidyalaya University Journal of Buddhist Studies 1: 91–105.

Anālayo (2010). The Genesis of the Bodhisattva Ideal. Hamburg: Hamburg University Press.

Anālayo (2011a). A Comparative Study of the Majjhima-nikāya. 2 vols., Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2011b). “The conversion of the Brahmin Sela in the Ekottarika-āgama.” Thai International Journal of Buddhist Studies 2: 37–56. Reprint, 2016b: 325–43.

Anālayo (2011c). “Vakkali’s Suicide in the Chinese Āgamas.” Buddhist Studies Review 28, no. 2: 155–70. Reprint, 2015: 235–56.

Anālayo (2012a). Madhyama-āgama Studies. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2012b). “Protecting Oneself and Others Through Mindfulness: The Acrobat Simile in the Saṃyukta-āgama.” Sri Lanka International Journal of Buddhist Studies 2: 1–23. Reprint, 2015: 311–32.

Anālayo (2014a). “Karma and Female Birth.” Journal of Buddhist Ethics 21: 107–51. Reprint, 2016b: 381–411.

Anālayo (2014b). “Maitreya and the Wheel-turning King.” Asian Literature and Translation. Reprint, 2017: 349–91.

Anālayo (2015). Saṃyukta-āgama Studies. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2016a). “The Vessantara-Jātaka and Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya Narrative.” Journal of the Oxford Centre for Buddhist Studies 11: 11–37. Reprint, 2017: 113–41.

Anālayo (2016b). Ekottarika-āgama Studies. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Anālayo (2016c). “The Gradual Path of Training in the Dīrgha-āgama, From Sense-restraint to Imperturbability.” The Indian International Journal of Buddhist Studies 17: 1–24.

Anālayo (2017). Vinaya Studies. Dharma Drum Institute of Liberal Arts Research Series 7. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation.

Andersen, Dines, and Helmer Smith. Sutta-Nipāta. London, Boston, Melbourne and Henley: Pali Text Society, [1913] 1984.

Andō, Fusae 安藤 房枝. “Unkō sekkutsu dairokkutsu chūshinchū no butsuden setsuwa ukibori ni tsuite: fuse zuzō no sōshutsu no mondai wo chūshin ni 雲崗石窟第 6 窟中心柱の仏伝説話浮彫について：「布施」図像の創出の問題を中心に [A study of reliefs of Buddha’s life on a stūpa-pillar in Yungang Cave 6: Focusing on creation of ‘offering’ icon].” Studies in Aesthetics and Art History 美学美術史研究論集 23 (2008): 33–62.

Banerjee, Anukul Chandra. Two Buddhist Vinaya Texts in Sanskrit: Prātimokṣa Sūtra and Bhikṣukarmavākya. Calcutta: The World Press Private Limited, 1977.

Bareau, André. “La construction et le culte des stūpa d’après les Vinayapitaka.” Bulletin de l’École Française d’Extrême-Orient 50, no. 2 (1962): 229–74.

Bechert, Heinz. Bruchstücke buddhistischer Verssammlungen aus zentralasiatischen Sanskrithandschriften 1: Die Anavataptagāthā und die Sthaviragāthā. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 6. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1961.

Bernhard, Franz. Udānavarga. 2 vols. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 10. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1965–68.

Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, trans. The Mahāsūtra “On Entering the City of Vaiśālī” (Vaiśālī­praveśa­mahā­sūtra, Toh 312). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Bonbunbutten-kenkyūkai 梵文仏典研究会 (1994). “Bonbun shamonkakyō wayaku (1) 梵文『沙門果経』和訳 (1) [An annotated Japanese translation of the Śrāmaṇya­phala­sūtra (1)].” The Bulletin of the Association of Buddhist Studies, Bukkyo University 佛教大学仏教学会紀要 2: 1–32.

Bonbunbutten-kenkyūkai (1995). “Bonbun shamonkakyō wayaku (2) 梵文『沙門果経』和訳 (2) [An annotated Japanese translation of the Śrāmaṇya­phala­sūtra (2)].” The Bulletin of the Association of Buddhist Studies, Bukkyo University 佛教大学仏教学会紀要 3: 17–57.

Brockington, Mary. “Daśaratha, Śyāma, a Brāhman Hunter, and Śrāvaṇa: The Tale of Four Tales (with Pictures).” In From Turfan to Ajanta: Festschrift for Dieter Schlingloff on the Occasion of his Eightieth Birthday. Vol. 1, 89–116. Bhairahawa, Rupandehi: Lumbini International Research Institute, 2010.

Brown, W. Norman. “Duty as Truth in Ancient India.” Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 116, no. 3 (1972): 252–68.

Burnouf, Eugène. Introduction à l’histoire du buddhisme indien. 2nd ed. Paris: Maisonneuve, 1876. (1st ed. 1844).

Caillat, Colette. “Pāli ibbha, Vedic íbhya-*.” In Buddhist Studies in Honour of I.B. Horner: 41–49. Dordrecht-Holland: D. Reidel Publishing Company, 1974.

Champa Thupten Zongtse. Udānavarga. Band III. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 10, 3. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1990.

Chandra Das, Sarat, and Hari Mohan Vidyābhūshaṇa. Avadāna Kalpalatā. Calcutta: The Royal Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1940.

Chavannes, Édouard. Cinq cents contes et apologues. 3 vols. Paris: Ernest Leroux, Éditeur, 1910–11.

Ch’en, Kenneth. “A Study of The Svāgata Story in The Divyāvadāna in Its Sanskrit, Pāli, Tibetan, and Chinese Versions.” Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 9, nos. 3/4 (1947): 207–314.

Choi, Jin kyoung. Three Sūtras from the Gilgit Dīrghāgama Manuscript: A Synoptic Critical Edition, Translation and Textual Analysis. PhD diss., Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München, 2015.

Choong, Mun-keat. The Fundamental Teachings of Early Buddhism: A comparative study based on the Sūtrāṅga portion of the Pali Saṃyutta-Nikāya and the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2000.

Chung, Jin-il (1998). Die Pravāraṇā in den kanonischen Vinaya-Texten der Mūla­sarvāstivādin und der Sarvāstivādin. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 7. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Chung, Jin-il (2008). A Survey of the Sanskrit Fragments Corresponding to the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama 雜阿含經相當梵文斷片一覧. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin.

Chung, Jin-il, and Takamichi Fukita. A Survey of the Sanskrit Fragments Corresponding to the Chinese Madhyamāgama. Tokyo: The Sankibo Press, 2011.

Chung, Jin-il, and Klaus Wille. “Fragmente aus dem Bhaiṣajyavastu der Sarvāstivādins in der Sammlung Pelliot (Paris).” Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen. Folge 4: 105–24. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 9. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 2002.

Clarke, Shayne (2009). “Monks Who Have Sex: Pārājika Penance in Indian Buddhist Monasticisms.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 37: 1–43.

Clarke, Shayne (2014). Gilgit Manuscripts in the National Archives of India: Facsimile Edition vol. 1, Vinaya Texts. Tokyo: The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology, Soka University.

Clarke, Shayne (2015). “Vinayas.” In Brill’s Encyclopedia of Buddhism, edited by Jonathan Silk et al., vol. 1, Literature and Languages, 60–87. Leiden: Brill, 2015.

Clarke, Shayne (2018). “Lost in Tibet, Found in Bhutan: The Unique Nature of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin Law Code for Nuns.” Buddhism, Law & Society 2: 199–292.

Cowell, Edward Byles, and Robert Alexander Neil. [1886]. The Divyāvadāna, a Collection of Early Buddhist Legends. Delhi: Indological Book House, 1987.

Csoma Körösi, Alexander. “Analysis of the Dulva.” Asiatic Researches 20, no. 1 (1836): 41–93. Reprint, Tibetan Studies: being a reprint of the articles contributed to the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal and Asiatic Researches. Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadò, 1984.

Das, Chandra. Tibetan-English Dictionary. Calcutta: Bengal Secretariat Book Depôt, 1902. Reprint, Kyoto: Rinsen Book Co., 1969.

Das Gupta, Kabita. Viśvantarāvadāna, eine buddhistische Legende. Edition eines Textes auf Sanskrit und Tibetisch eingeleitet und übersetzt. PhD diss., Freie Universität Berlin, 1978.

Dave, K. N. Birds in Sanskrit Literature with 107 Bird Illustrations. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 2005.

De Chiara, Matteo. The Khotanese Sudhanāvadāna. Beiträge zur Indologie 48. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2013.

Deeg, Max. “Has Xuanzang really been in Mathurā? Interpretatio Sinica or Interpretatio Occidentalia‍—How to Critically Read the Records of the Chinese Pilgrim.” In Essays on East Asian Religion and Culture: Festschrift in honour of Nishiwaki Tsuneki on the occasion of his 65th birthday, 35–73. Kyoto: Editorial committee for the Festschrift in honour of Nishiwaki Tsuneki, 2007.

Degener, Almuth (1990). Das Kaṭhināvadāna. Indica et Tibetica Band 16. Bonn: Indica et Tibetica Verlag.

Degener, Almuth (1991). “Die handschriftliche Überlieferung des Vinayavastu der Mūla­sarvāstivādin. By Klaus Wille.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 111, no. 3: 588–89.

Delhey, Martin. “Vakkali: A New Interpretation of His Suicide.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 13 (2009): 67–108.

Demoto, Mitsuyo, and Michael Hahn. “Ergänzungen zur Überlieferung des Śyāmajātaka.” In From Turfan to Ajanta: Festschrift for Dieter Schlingloff on the Occasion of his Eightieth Birthday. Vol. 1, 215–48. Bhairahawa, Rupandehi: Lumbini International Research Institute, 2010.

Dhammadinnā (2014). “A Translation of a Discourse Quotation in the Tibetan Translation of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya Parallel to Chinese Saṃyukta-āgama Discourse 36 and of the Discourse Quotations in Śamathadeva’s Abhidharma­kośopāyikā-ṭīkā Parallel to Chinese Saṃyukta-āgama Discourses 39, 42, 45, 46, 55, 56, 57 and 58.” Dharma Drum Journal of Buddhist Studies 14: 73–128.

Dhammadinnā (2015–16). “Women’s Aspirations and Soteriological Agency in Sarvāstivāda and Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya Narratives.” Buddhism, Law & Society 1: 33–67.

Dhammadinnā (2018). “Karma Here and Now in a Mūlasarvāstivāda Avadāna: How the Bodhisattva Changed Sex and Was Born as a Female 500 Times*.” Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 21: 63–94.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2013). The Play in Full (Lalita­vistara, Toh 95). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2013.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2019). The Precious Discourse on the Blessed One’s Extensive Wisdom That Leads to Infinite Certainty (Niṣṭhā­gata­bhagavajjñāna­vaipulya­sūtra­ratnānanta, Toh 317). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2019.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. trans. (2021). Distinctly Ascertaining the Meanings (Arthaviniścayadharmaparyāya, Toh 317). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2021.

Dharmachakra Translation Committee, trans. (2023). trans. The Queen of Incantations: The Great Peahen (Toh 559). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2023.

Dimitrov, Dragomir. “Some Remarks on the Rūpyāvatyavadāna of the Divyāvadāna(mālā).” In Bauddhasāhityastabakāvalī: Essays and Studies on Buddhist Sanskrit Literature dedicated to Claus Vogel by colleagues, students, and friends: 45–68. Indica et Tibetica Band 36. Marburg: Indica et Tibetica Verlag, 2008.

Durt, Hubert (1980). “Mahalla/Mahallaka et la crise de la communauté apprès le parinirvāṇa du Buddha.” In Indianisme et bouddhisme: Mélanges offerts à Mgr. Étienne Lamotte: 79–99. Louvain-la-Neuve: Université catholique de Louvain, Institut orientaliste.

Durt, Hubert (1999). “The Offering of the Children of Prince Viśvantara/Sudāna in the Chinese Tradition.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 2: 147–82.

Durt, Hubert (2000). “The Casting-off of Mādrī in the Northern Buddhist Literary Tradition.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 3: 133–58.

Durt, Hubert (2005). “Kajaṅgalā, who could have been the last mother of the Buddha.” Journal of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies 9: 65–90.

Dutt, Nalinaksha. Gilgit Manuscripts, vol. 3 in 4 parts. Srinagar: Research Department, 1942–50. Reprint, Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications. 1984.

Edgerton, Franklin. [1953]. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. 2 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1998.

Einoo, Shingo 永ノ尾 信悟 (1984). “Kodai indo saishiki bunken ni kijutsu sareta kokumotsu ryōkri 古代インド祭式文献に記述された穀物料理 [Definition of ancient Indian food from grain based on Vedic ritual literature].” Bulletin of the National Museum of Ethnology 国立民族学博物館研究報告 9, no.3: 521–32.

Einoo, Shingo (1988). Die Cāturmāsya oder die altindischen Tertialopfer dargestellt nach den Vorschriften der Brāhmaṇas und der Śrautasūtras. Monumenta Serindica No. 18. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Enomoto, Fumio 榎本文雄 (1984a). “Setsuissaiubukei āgama no tenkai: ‘Chūagon’ to ‘Zōagon’ wo megutte, 説一切有部系アーガマの展開: 『中阿含』と『雑阿含』をめぐって [The development of the Sarvāstivādin scriptures, with a special focus on the Madhyamāgama and Saṃyuktāgama].” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 印度學佛教學研究 32, no. 2: 1073–70.

Enomoto, Fumio (1984b). “Higashi torukisutan shutsudo bonbun agon no keifu 東トルキスタン出土梵文阿含の系譜 [The lineage of transmission of the Sanskrit āgamas unearthed from Eastern Turkestan].” Kachō tanki daigaku kenkyū kiyō 華頂短期大学研究紀要 [Bulletin of Kacho Junior College] 29: 11–26.

Enomoto, Fumio (1991–94). A Comprehensive Study of the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama: Indic Texts Corresponding to the Chinese Saṃyuktāgama as Found in the Sarvāstivāda-Mūlasarvāstivāda Literature Part 1: *Saṃgītanipāta. Kyoto.

Fausbøll, V. [1877–96]. The Jātaka together with its Commentary. 6 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1962–64.

Feer, Léon. [1884–98]. Saṃyutta-Nikāya. 5 vols. London/Oxford: Pali Text Society, 1975–2006.

Finnegan, Damchö Diana. “For the Sake of Women, Too”: Ethics and Gender in the Narratives of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya. PhD diss., University of Wisconsin-Madison, 2009

Fiordalis, David. “The Buddha’s Great Miracle at Śrāvastī: a Translation from the Tibetan Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Asian Literature and Translation 2, no. 3 (2014): 1–33.

Frauwallner, Erich. The Earliest Vinaya and the Beginnings of Buddhist Literature. Serie Orientale Roma 8. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente, 1956.

Fukita, Takamichi 吹田 隆道. “Soreyue ima, Ānanda yo: ‘jikie hōkie’ no seppō saikō それゆえ今、アーナンダよ―「自帰依・法帰依」の説法再考― [Therefore now, Ānanda: A reconsideration of the preaching of Atta-saraṇa and Dhamma-saraṇa].” In Kagawa Takao hakushi koki kinen ronshū: bukkyōgaku jōdogaku kenkyū 香川孝雄博士古稀記念論集 佛教学浄土学研究 [Studies on Buddhism and Pure Land Buddhism: Felicitation volume in Honour of Dr. Takao Kagawa on the occasion of his 70th birthday]:157–66. Kyoto: Nagata bunshōdō 永田文昌堂, 2001.

Glass, Andrew. Four Gāndhārī Saṃyuktāgama Sūtras: Senior Kharoṣṭhī Fragment 5. Seattle and London: University of Washington Press, 2007.

Gnoli, Raniero (1977–78). The Gilgit Manuscript of the Saṅghabhedavastu: Being the 17th and Last Section of the Vinaya of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin. 2 vols. Serie Orientale Roma 49, nos. 1–2. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente.

Gnoli, Raniero (1978). The Gilgit Manuscript of the Śayanāsanavastu and the Adhikaraṇavastu: Being the 15th and 16th Sections of the Vinaya of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin. Serie Orientale Roma 50. Roma: Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Estremo Oriente.

Hahn, Michael. Poetical Visions of the Buddha’s Former Lives: Seventeen Legends from Haribhaṭṭa’s Jātakamālā. New Delhi: Aditya Prakashan, 2011.

Hara, Minoru. “Right in India and Left in China? On I-Ching’s Translation of the Sudhanakumārāvadāna.” In Amṛtadhārā: Professor R. N. Dandekar Felicitation Volume, 159–66. Delhi: Ajanta Publications, 1984.

Harrison, Paul, and Jens-Uwe Hartmann, eds. From Birch Bark to Digital Data: Recent Advances in Buddhist Manuscript Research. Papers Presented at the Conference Indic Buddhist Manuscripts: The State of the Field, Stanford, June 15–19 2009. Vienna: Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 2014.

Hartmann, Jens-Uwe (1991). “Endangered by Man-eating Witches: a Fragment of the Siṃhalāvadana from the Turfan Finds.” In Papers in Honour of Prof. Dr. Ji Xianlin on the Occasion of His 80th Birthday. Vol. 2, 563–75. Nanchang shi: Jiangxi renmin chubanshe 江西人民出版社.

Hartmann, Jens-Uwe (2004). “Contents and Structure of the Dīrghāgama of the (Mūla-)Sarvāstivādins.” Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 7: 119–37.

Hartmann, Jens-Uwe, and Klaus Wille. “The Manuscript of the Dīrghāgama and the Private Collection in Virginia.” In Harrison and Hartmann, eds., 2014: 137–55.

Hashimoto, Sōko 橋本 草子. “Shuyāma honjō setsuwa no henyō シュヤーマ本生説話の変容: 仏典を中心とする [The Change of Śyāma Jātaka].” Kyōto Women’s University Journal of Humanities 京都女子大学人文論叢 50 (2002):109–30.

Hikata, Ryūshō 干潟 龍祥. Honjōkyōrui no shisōshi teki kenkyū 本生経類の思想史的研究 [“A historical study of the thoughts in jātakas and similar stories”]. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林. Revised and enlarged edition, 1978.

Hinüber, Oskar von. “The Gilgit Manuscripts: An Ancient Buddhist Library in Modern Research.” In Harrison and Hartmann, eds., 2014: 79–135.

Hirakawa, Akira 平川 彰. Nihyakugojikkai no kenkyū 二百五十戒の研究 [“Studies on the two hundred and fifty rules”]. 4 vols. Hirakawa Akira chosakushū 平川彰著作集 [The collected works of Akira Hirakawa] vol. 14–17. Tokyo: Shunjūsha 春秋社,1993–95.

Hiraoka, Satoshi 平岡 聡 (1998). “The Relation between the Divyāvadāna and the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 26: 419–34.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2002a). “Shikishin toshite kinō suru budda no aikon: buttō wo meguru setsuissaiubu no ritsu to ron tono sogo 色身として機能するブッダのアイコン: 仏塔を巡る説一切有部の律と論との齟齬 [The icon of the Buddha functioning as his material body].” In Sakurabe hakushi kiju kinen ronshū 櫻部建博士喜寿記念論集　初期仏教からアビダルマへ [“Early Buddhism and Abhidharma thought: in honor of Doctor Hajime Sakurabe on his seventy-seventh birthday”], 185–98. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten 平楽寺書店.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2002b). Setsuwa no kōkogaku: Indo bukkyō setsuwa ni himerareta shisō 説話の考古学: ンド仏教説話に秘められた思想 [“The archaeology of narratives: thoughts hidden in Indian Buddhist narratives”]. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大蔵出版.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2007). Budda ga nazotoku sanze no monogatari: ‘Diviya-avadāna’ zen’yaku ブッダが謎解く三世の物語 『ディヴィヤ・アヴァダーナ』全訳 [“The stories of the past, present, and future revealed by the Buddha: a complete translation of the Divyāvadāna”]. 2 vols. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大蔵出版.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2009). “Text critical remarks on the Divyāvadāna (1).” Annual Report of the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology 12: 29–72.

Hiraoka, Satoshi (2011). “Review Article: The Divyāvadāna in English.” Indo-Iranian Journal 54: 231–70.

Hirata, Masahiro 平田 昌弘, Nozomi Itagaki 板垣 希美, Kenji Uchida 内田 健治, Masa’aki Hanada 花田 正明, and Masahito Kawai 河合　正人. “Ko-chūki indo-āria bunken ‘Veda bunken’ ‘Pāli seiten’ ni motozuita minami ajia no kodai nyūseihin no saigen to dōtei 古・中期インド・アーリア文献 「Veda 文献」 「Pāli 聖典」に基づいた南アジアの古代乳製品の再現と同定 [Reproduction and identification of ancient dairy products in South Asia based on the old and middle Indo-Aryan literatures, ‘Vedic ritual’ and the ‘Pāli canon’].” Nihon Chikusan Gakkaihō 日本畜産学会報 84, no. 2 (2013): 175–90.

Hofinger, Marcel (1954) [1982] Le congrès du Lac Anavatapta (Vies de saints bouddhiques): Extrait du Vinaya des Mūla­sarvāstivādin Bhaiṣajyavastu 1, Légendes des anciens (Sthavirāvadāna). Louvain: Publications Universitaires.

Hofinger, Marcel (1990). Le congrès du Lac Anavatapta (Vies de saints bouddhiques): Extrait du Vinaya des Mūla­sarvāstivādin Bhaiṣajyavastu 2, Légendes du Buddha (Buddhāvadāna). Louvain-la-Neuve: Université Catholique de Louvain, Institut orientaliste.

Honjō, Yoshifumi 本庄 良文 (1984). A Table of Āgama-Citations in the Abhidharmakośa and the Abhidharmakoṣopāyikā Part 1 倶舎論所依阿含全表. Kyoto: private edition.

Honjō, Yoshifumi (2014). Kusharonchū Upāikā no kenkyū: Yakuchūhen 倶舎論註ウパーイカーの研究　訳註篇 [“A study of the Abhidharma­kośopāyikā-ṭīkā: an annotated translation”]. 2 vols. Tokyo: Daizō Shuppan 大蔵出版.

Hosoda Noriaki 細田 典明 (1991). “Sanskrit Fragments from the Parivrājakasaṃyukta of the Saṃyuktāgama (3).” Journal of Indian philosophy and Buddhism 印度哲学仏教学 6: 172–91.

Hosoda Noriaki (2006). “ ‘Zōagon’ Dōhon to ‘Komponsetsuissaiubu binaya yakuji.’ 『雑阿含』道品と『根本説一切有部毘奈耶薬事』 [Saṃyuktāgama Mārga­varga and Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya Bhaiṣajya­vastu].” Journal of Buddhist Studies 佛教學 48: 1–20.

Hosoda Noriaki (2014). “ ‘Zōagon’ Dōhon Nenjo Sō’ō 『雑阿含』道品念處相応 [Smṛtyupastāna-saṃyukta of the Mārgavarga, Saṃyuktāgama].” Journal of Indian Philosophy and Buddhism インド哲学仏教学論集 2: 47–169.

Ingalls, Daniel Henry Holmes. “Source of a Mūla­sarvāstivādin Story of the Origin of the Ganges.” Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 14 (1951):185–88.

Ishikawa, Mie. A Critical Edition of the sGra sbyor bam po gnyis pa: An Old and Basic Commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti. Tokyo: Toyo Bunko, 1990.

Iwamoto, Yutaka 岩本 裕 (1967). Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū dai’ichi: Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū josetsu 佛教説話研究第一 佛教説話研究序説 [“A Study of Buddhist narrative literature vol. 1: An introduction to the study of Buddhist narrative literature”]. Kyoto: Hōzōkan 法藏館. Revised edition, 1978.

Iwamoto, Yutaka (1978). Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū josetsu: Bukkyō setsuwa kenkyū vol. 1 仏教説話研究序説: 仏教説話研究 第一巻 [“An introduction to the study of Buddhist narrative literature: a study of Buddhist narrative literature vol. 1”]. Tokyo: Kaimei shoin 開明書院.

Iwamoto, Yutaka (1979). Sumāgadā avadāna kenkyū [“A study of the Sumāgadhāvadāna”]. Tokyo: Kaimei shoin 開明書院.

Jaini, Padmanabh S. “The Story of Sudhana and Manoharā: An Analysis of the Texts and the Borobudur Reliefs.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London 29, no. 3 (1966): 533–58.

Jäschke, H. A. 1881. Tibetan English Dictionary. London: The Secretary of State for India in Council. Compact edition, Kyoto: Rinsen Book Co., 1993.

Jamspal, Lozang, and Kaia Tara Fischer, trans. The Hundred Deeds (Karmaśataka, Toh 340). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2020.

Ji, Xianlin. 1943. “Parallelversionen zur tocharischen Rezension des Punyavanta-Jātaka.” Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 97, no. 2: 284–324. The author’s name is given as Dschi Hiän-lin.

Jones, John James. 1949–56. The Mahāvastu. 3 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1973–78.

Kalsang Gyaltsen, Venerable Khenpo and Chodrungma Kunga Chodron, trans. The Exemplary Tale of Sumāgadhā (Sumāga­dhāvadāna, Toh 346). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2024.

Kane, Pandurang Vaman. History of Dharmaśāstra (Ancient and Medieval Religious and Civil Law), vol. iii. Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Risearch Institute, 1973.

Karashima, Seishi, and Margarita I. Vorobyova Desyatovskaya. “The Avadāna Anthology from Merv, Turkmenistan.” In Buddhist Manuscripts from Central Asia: The St. Petersburg Sanskrit Fragments (StPSF), vol. 1, edited by Seishi Karashima and Margarita I. Vorobyova-Desyatovskaya, 145–523. Tokyo: The Institute of Oriental Manuscripts of the Russian Academy of Sciences and the International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology, Soka University, 2015.

Khoroche, Peter. Once a Peacock, Once an Actress: Twenty-Four Lives of the Bodhisattva from Haribhaṭṭa’s “Jātakamālā”. Chicago & London: The University of Chicago Press, 2017.

Kieffer-Pülz, Petra. Review of Silk, Jonathan A., Managing Monks. Administrators and Administrative Roles in Indian Buddhist Monasticism. Indo-Iranian Journal 53 (2010): 71–88.

Kishino, Ryōji IV (2013). A Study of the Nidāna: An Underrated Canonical Text of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya. PhD diss., University of California, Los Angeles.

Kishino, Ryōji IV (2016). “A Further Study of the Muktaka of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya: A Table of Contents and Parallels.” The Bulletin of the Association of Buddhist Studies, Bukkyo University. 21: 227–83.

Kritzer, Robert. Garbhāvakrāntisūtra: The Sūtra on Entry into the Womb. Tokyo: The International Institute for Buddhist Studies, 2014.

Kuan, Tse-fu. “Legends and Transcendence: Sectarian Affiliations of the Ekottarikāgama in Chinese Translation.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 133, no. 4 (2013): 607–34.

Kudō, Nobuyuki (2004). The Karmavibhaṅga: Transliterations and Annotations of the Original Sanskrit Manuscripts from Nepal. Tokyo: The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology.

Kudō, Nobuyuki (2015). “Newly Identified Manuscripts in the Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts: Avadānas and Dhāraṇīs.” Annual Report of The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 18: 253–62.

Kudō, Nobuyuki (2017). Gilgit Manuscripts in the National Archives of India: Facsimile Edition vol. 3, Avadānas and Miscellaneous Texts. Tokyo: The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology, Soka University.

Lamotte, Étienne (1944–1980). Le traité de la grande vertu de sagesse de Nāgārjuna (Mahāprajñāpāramitāśāstra). 5 vols. Volumes 1–2 were originally published by Bureaux du Muséon in Louvain in 1944 and 1949, respectively, and reprinted by Institute orientaliste of the Université de Louvain in Louvain-la-Neuve in 1981. Volumes 3–5 were published by the latter publisher in 1970, 1976, and 1980.

Lamotte, Étienne (1951). “Alexandre et le bouddhisme.” Bulletin de l’École Française d’Extrême-Orient 44, no. 1: 147–62.

Lamotte, Étienne (1957). “Khuddakanikāya and Kṣudraka­piṭaka.” East and West 7, no. 4: 341–48.

Lamotte, Étienne (1958). Histoire du bouddhisme indien, des origines à l’ère Śaka. Bibliothèque du Muséon. Vol. 43. Louvain: Publications universitaires, Institut orientaliste.

Lamotte, Étienne (1966). “Vajrapāṇi en Inde.” Mélanges de sinologie offerts à Monsieur Paul Demièville II. Bibliothèque de l’Institut des hautes études chinoises. Vol. 20, 113–59. Paris: Presses universitaires de France.

Lamotte, Étienne (1988). History of Indian Buddhism. Louvain-la-Neuve: Université Catholique de Louvain, Institute orientaliste. Translated by Sara Webb-Boin.

Li, Rongxi. The Great Tang Dynasty Record of the Western Regions. Berkeley: Numata Center for Buddhist Translation and Research, 1996.

Li, Wei. Schwanfrau und Prinz: Die chinesische Frühform einer Divyāvadāna-Legende. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag, 2012.

Lilley, Mary E. The Apadāna. 2 vols. Oxford: Pali Text Society, 2000.

Liu, Zhen 劉 震. Chanding yu kuxiu : guan yu fozhuan yuanchu fanben de faxian he yanjiu 禅定与苦修: 関于佛伝原初梵本的發現和研究 [Dhyānāni tapaś ca: meditation and ascetic practice: the finding of an original Sanskrit manuscript on the Buddha’s biography and its study]. Shanghai: Shanghai guji 上海古籍, 2010.

Malalasekera, G.P. Dictionary of Pāli Proper Names. 2 vols. London: Pali Text Society, 1937.

Mayeda, Egaku 前田 惠學. Genshi bukkyō seiten no seiritsushi kenkyū 原始佛教聖典の成立史研究 [“A history of the formation of original Buddhist scriptures”]. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林, 1964.

Matsumoto, Junko 松本 純子. “Kachangarā monogatari: musuko eno omoi: “karumashataka” dai 33 wa and dai 42 wa カチャンガラー物語・息子への想い―『カルマシャタカ』第 33 話・第 42 話　和訳― [The story of Kacaṅgalā: love for her son. Japanese translations of the 33rd and 42nd story of the Karmaśataka].” Zentsūji kyōgaku shinkōkai kiyō 善通寺教学振興会紀要 15 (2010): 1–15.

Matsumura, Hisashi 松村 恒 (1980). Four Avadānas from the Gilgit Manuscripts. PhD diss., Australian National University.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1985). “Raitawarakyō no tenkai no ichidammen 頼吒和羅経の展開の一断面 [An aspect of the development of the Rāṣṭrapāla-sūtra].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 15: 39–62.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1988a). “Gleanings from the Gilgit Manuscripts‍—Serial No. 1: Vinayavastu‍—.” Aligarh Journal of Oriental Studies 5: 163–76.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1988b). The Mahāsudarśanāvadāna and The Mahāsudarśanasūtra. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1989a). “Āyuḥparyantasūtra: Das Sūtra von der Lebensdauer in den verschiedenen Welten Text in Sanskrit und Tibetisch.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen, Folge 1, 70–100. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 2. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Matsumura, Hisashi (1989b). “Preamble to the Anavataptagāthā.” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 18: 125–60.

Matsuyama, Shuntarō 松山 俊太郎 (1980–2002). “Kodai indo jin no yoso’oi 古代インド人のよそおい [Ancient Indian makeup].” Keshō bunka 化粧文化 3–42.

Melzer, Gudrun (2010a). Ein Abschnitt aus dem Dīrghāgama. PhD diss., Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München.

Melzer, Gudrun (2010b). “Sanskrit sources corresponding to the Caitya­pradakṣiṇa­gāthā inscription in Alchi.” Berliner Indologische Studien 19: 54–70. Appendix B in Kurt Tropper, “The Caitya­pradakṣiṇa­gāthā Inscription in Alchi: A Valuable Witness for Kanjur Studies.” Berliner Indologische Studien 19: 15–70.

Miller, Robert. The Chapter on Going Forth (Pravryjyāvastu, Toh 1-1). 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2018.

Mizuno, Kōgen 水野 弘元 (1981). Hokku kyō no kenkyū 法句経の研究 [“A study of the Dharmapada”]. Tokyo: Shunjūsha 春秋社.

Mizuno, Kōgen (1992). “ ‘Suttanipāta’ no ge ya kyō no taiōhyō 『スッタニパータ』の偈や経の対応表 [A comparative study of the Suttanipāta].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 21: 2–56.

Mizuno, Kōgen (1993). “Chōrōe, chōrōnige no taishōhyō 長老偈, 長老尼偈の対応表 [A comparative study of the Theragāthā and the Therīgāthā].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 22: 3–83.

Mizuno, Kōgen (1995). “Shohokkukyō no ge no hikaku taishō 諸法句経の偈の比較対照 [A comparison of the verses of the Dhammapada texts].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 24: 5–76.

Monier-Williams, Monier. A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1899.

Morris, Richard, A.K. Warder, E. Hardy, and Mabel Hunt. [1885–1961]. The Anguttara-nikāya. 6 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1958–76.

Muldoon-Hules, Karen Maria. “Of Milk and Motherhood: The Kacaṅgalā Avadāna Read in a Brahmanical Light.” Religions of South Asia 3, no. 1 (2009): 111–24.

Murakami, Shinkan 村上 真完. Sai’iki no bukkyō: bezekuriku seiganga kō 西域の仏教: ベゼクリク誓願画考 [“The praṇidhi scenes of the cave temples at Bezeklik in Chinese Turkestan”]. Tokyo: Daisan bunmei sha 第三文明社, 1984.

Namikawa, Takayoshi 並川 孝儀. Indo bukkyō kyōdan shōryōbu no kenkyū インド仏教教団正量部の研究 [“A study of the Indian Buddhist Sāṃmitīya sect”]. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大藏出版, 2011.

Nattier, Jan. “The Realm of Akṣobhya: A Missing Piece in the History of Pure Land Buddhism.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 23, no. 1 (2000): 71–102.

Negi, J. S. Tibetan-Sanskrit Dictionary. 16 vols. Sarnath/Varanasi: Central Institute of Higher Tibetan Studies, 1993–2005.

Nishimoto, Ryūzan 西本 龍山. Ritsubu 律部 [Vinaya section] 23. Kokuyaku issaikyō 國譯一切經 [“A translation of the complete Buddhist canon into classical Japanese in kakikudashi style”]. Tokyo: Daitō shuppansha 大東出版社, 1933.

Nishimura, Naoko. “Processing of Dairy Products in the Vedic Ritual, Compared with Pāli.” In Vedic Studies: Language, Text, Culture and Philosophy, Proceedings of the 15th World Sanskrit Conference: 211–42. New Delhi: D.K. Printworld, 2014.

Norman, K.R. [1906]. The Commentary on the Dhammapada. 4 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1970.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi 荻原 裕敏 (2010). “Tokarago A Bṛhaddyuti-Jātaka no buhakizoku ni tsuite トカラ語 A 《 Bṛhaddyuti-Jātaka 》の部派帰属について [On the school affiliation of the Bṛhaddyuti-Jātaka in Tocharian A].” Tokyo University Linguistic Papers 東京大学言語学論集 30: 169–86.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2011). “Arannakyō ni hitei sareta SHT shoshū bongo danpen ni tsuite 「 阿蘭那經」に比定された SHT 所収梵語断片について [Sanskrit fragments identified as the Ālánnàjīng in SHT].” Tokyo University Linguistics Papers 東京大学言語学論集 31: 235–68.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2015a). “Tuhuoluoyu wenxian suojian foming xilie–yi chutu fodian yu kumutula kuqun 吐火羅語文献所見佛名系列–以出土佛典与庫木吐喇窟群区第 34 窟榜題爲例 [Lists of former buddhas in Tocharian texts: A comparative study of unearthed manuscripts and captions in Kumtura Cave no. 34].” Literature & History of ern Regions 西域文史 9: 33–49.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2015b). “The transmission of Buddhist Texts to Tokharian Buddhism.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 38: 295–312.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2016a). “ ‘Komponsetsuissaiuburitsu yakuji’ ni kanren suru niten no tokarago B dampen ni tsuite 『根本説一切有部律薬事』に関連する二点のトカラ語 B 断片について [On two Tokharian fragments related to the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya].” In Shirukurōdo to kindai nihon no kaikō: sai’iki kodai shiryō to nihon kindai bukkyō シルクロードと近代日本の邂逅―西域古代資料と日本近代仏教 [The encounter of the Silk Road and modern Japan: ancient Central Asian materials and modern Japanese Buddhism], 258–76, Tokyo: Bensei shuppan 勉誠出版.

Ogihara, Hirotoshi (2016b). “Doitsu shozō tokarago B dampen B384 ni tsuite ドイツ所蔵トカラ語 B 断片 B384 について [Tocharian Fragment B384 of the Berlin Turfan Collection].” Tokyo University Linguistics Papers 東京大学言語学論集 37: e69–e79.

Okada, Mamiko 岡田 真美子. “Ryū honjō (2) kukishashintan to ryūnikushoku setsuwa 龍本生 (2) 救飢捨身譚と龍肉食説話‍—根本説一切有部薬事を中心に‍— [Former birth stories of the Buddha: Naga (2)].” Bulletin of Kobe Women’s University 神戸女子大学紀要 (文学部篇) 26, no. 1 (1993): 157–68.

Okano, Kiyoshi 岡野 潔 (2006). “Anavataptagāthā no shakuson no gō no zanshi wo toku innenwa no keisei, Anavataptagāthā の釈尊の業の残滓を説く因縁話の形成 [An essay on formations of the Buddhāvadāna of the Anavatapta­gāthā and its parallels].” Ronshū 論集, Indogaku shūkyō gakkai 印度学宗教学会 33: 73–93.

Okano, Kiyoshi (2007). “Kṣemendra no Daśa­karma­plutyavadāna‍—Bodhisattvāvadāna­kalpalatā dai 50 shō no kōtei to yaku, Kṣemendraの Daśakarmaplutyavadāna ‍— Bodhisattvāvadānakalpalatā 第 50 章の校訂と訳‍— [Kṣemendra’s Daśa­karma­plutyavadāna: a text-critical edition and translation of the 50th chapter of the Bodhisattvāvadāna­kalpalatā].” South Asian Classical Studies 南アジア古典学 2: 201–301.

Okano, Kiyoshi (2008). “Avadānakalpalatā 55 章、 91–92 章と Karmaśataka 125–126 話‍—Sarvaṃdada, Śibi, Maitrakanyaka の校訂・和訳‍— [The Avadāna­kalpalatā chs. 55, 91, and 92 and the Karmaśataka 125, 126: texts and translations of Sarvaṃdada, Sibi, and Maitrakanyaka].” South Asian Classical Studies 南アジア古典学 3: 57–155.

Okano, Kiyoshi (2010). “Kalpalatā と Avadānamālā の研究 (1)―Vidura, Kaineyaka, Śreṣṭhipretībhūta の説話 [A study of the Kalpalatā and Avadānamālā 1: the stories of Vidura, Kaineyaka, and Śreṣṭhipretībhūta].” South Asian Classical Studies 南アジア古典学 5: 51–127.

Oldenberg, Hermann. [1879–83]. The Vinaya Piṭakaṃ. 5 vols. London and Oxford: The Pali Text Society, 1982–97.

Oldenberg, Hermann, and Richard Pischel. [1883]. The Thera- and Therī-gāthā. London: The Pali Text Society, 1966.

Olivelle, Patrick. A Sanskrit Dictionary of Law and Statecraft. Delhi: Primus Books, 2015.

Ono, Genmyo 小野 玄妙. Bukkyō no bijutsu oyobi rekishi 佛教之美術及歷史 [“Buddhist Art and History”]. Tokyo: Bussho kenkyū kai 佛書研究會, 1916.

Panglung, Jampa Losang (1980). “Preliminary Remarks on the Uddānas in the Vinaya of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin.” In Tibetan Studies in Honour of Hugh Richardson: Proceedings the International Seminar on Tibetan Studies, Oxford, 1979, 226–32. Warminster: Aris & Phillips.

Panglung, Jampa Losang (1981). Die Erzählstoffe des Mūlasarvāstivāda-Vinaya: Analysiert auf Grund der tibetischen Übersetzung. Studia Philologica Buddhica: Monograph Series 3. Tokyo: The Reiyukai Library.

Park, Chongdok, C.H. “The Buddha’s Eating of Horse-Fodder Barley in the Mūla­sarvāstivādin Vinaya.” In Buddhist Narrative in Asia and Beyond, 31–44. Bangkok: Institute of Thai Studies, Chulalongkorn University, 2012.

Pathak, Suniti K. “A Dharani-Mantra in the Vinaya-Vastu.” Bulletin of Tibetology 2 (1989): 31–39.

Pinaut, Georges-Jean. Chrestomathie tokharienne: textes et grammaire. Leuven-Paris: Peeters, 2008.

Pradhan, P. Abhidharm-koshabhāṣya of Vasubandhu. Patna: K. P. Jayaswal Research Institute, 1967.

Przyluski, Jean. “Le nord-ouest de l’Inde dans le Vinaya des Mūla-Sarvāstivādins et les textes apparentés.” Journal Asiatique 11ͤ série, tome 4 (1914): 493–568.

Ramers, Peter. Die “drei Kapitel über die Sittlichkeit” im Śrāmāṇyaphala-sūtra. PhD diss., Rheinischen Friedrich-Willhelms-Universität zu Bonn, 1996.

Rhys Davids, Thomas William, J. Estlin Carpenter, and William Stede. The Sumaṅgala-vilāsinī Buddhaghosa’s commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya. 3 vols. London: Pali Text Society, 1968–71. Second edition.

Rhys Davids, Thomas William, and J. Estlin Carpenter. 1890–1911. The Dīgha Nikāya. 3 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1966–76.

Rhys Davids, Thomas William, and William Stede. The Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary. London: The Pali Text Society. 1921–25. Revised reprint, 2015.

Rosen, Valentina. Der Vinayavibhaṅga zum Bhikṣuprātimokṣa der Sarvāstivādins. Sanskrittexte aus den Turfanfunden 2. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1959.

Rotman, Andy. Divine Stories: Divyāvadāna. 2 vols. Boston: Wisdom Publications, 2008–17.

Sadakata, Akira 定方 晟. “Kinnara キンナラ.” Proceedings of the Faculty of Letters of Tokai University 東海大学紀要 文学部 32 (1979): 31–43.

Sakaki, Ryōzaburō 榊 亮三郎 (1912–15). “Diviāvadāna no kenkyū narabini hon’yaku 「 デイヸアーヷダーナ」の研究並に翻譯 [A study and translation of the Divyāvadāna].” Rokujō gakuhō 六條學報 134–38, 140–50, 152, 153, 155–59, 161, 162, 169.

Sakaki, Ryōzaburō [1916] (1998). Bonzōkanwa shiyaku taikō hon’yaku myōgi taishū 梵藏漢和四譯對校 飜譯名義大集 [“A quadrilingual Sanskrit-Tibetan-Chinese-Japanese edition of the Mahāvyutpatti”]. Kyoto: Rinsen Shoten 臨川書店.

Salomon, Richard (2008). Two Gāndhārī Manuscripts of the Songs of Lake Anavatapta (Anavataptagāthā): British Library Kharoṣṭhī Fragment 1 and Senior Scroll 14. Seattle and London: University of Washington Press.

Salomon, Richard (2018). The Buddhist Literature of Ancient Gandhāra. Somerville: Wisdom Publications.

Sarma, Sreeramula Rajeswara. “Some Medieval Arithmetical Tables.” Indian Journal of History of Science, 32(3), 1997.

Sasaki, Shizuka 佐々木 閑 (1999). Shukke toha nanika 出家とはなにか [“What is ‘going forth?’”]. Tokyo: Daizō shuppan 大藏出版.

Sasaki, Shizuka (2000). “Basharon to ritsu 婆沙論と律 [Vinayas quoted in the Vibhāṣā].” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 印度學佛教學研究 49(1): 421–413.

Schiefner, Anton [1882]. Tibetan Tales Derived from Indian Sources. Translated into English by W. R. S. Ralston. Reprint, The Bible of Tibet: Tibetan Tales from Indian Sources. London: Kegan Paul, 2003.

Schlingloff, Dieter (1977). “König Prabhāsa und der Elefant.” Indologica Taurinensia 5: 139–52.

Schlingloff, Dieter (1985). “Das śyāma-Jātaka: Schultradition und Bildüberlieferung einer buddhistischen Legende.” In Zur Schulzugehörigkeit von Werken der Hīnayāna-Literatur, Teil 1, 203–18. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Schlingloff, Dieter (2000). Erzählende Wandmalereien Vol I Interpretation. Ajanta: Handbuch der Malereien 1. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Schlingloff, Dieter (2013). Narrative Wall-paintings Vol. I Interpretation. Ajanta: Handbook of the Paintings 1. New Delhi: Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts. English version of Schlingloff 2000.

Schmithausen, Lambert. “Beiträge zur Schulzugehörigkeit und Textgeschichte kanonischer und postkanonischer buddhistischer Materialien.” In Zur Schulzugehörigkeit von Werken der Hīnayāna-Literatur, Teil 2, 304–435. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1987.

Schopen, Gregory (1985). “Two Problems in the History of Indian Buddhism: The Layman/Monk Distinction and the Doctrines of the Transference of Merit.” Studien zur Indologie und Iranistik 10: 9–47. Reprint, 1997: 23–55.

Schopen, Gregory (1987). “Burial Ad Sanctos and the Physical Presence of the Buddha in Early Indian Buddhism: A Study in the Archaeology of Religions.” Religion 17: 193–225. Reprint, 1997: 114–47.

Schopen, Gregory (1995). “Monastic Law Meets the Real World: A Monk’s Continuing Right to Inherit Family Property in Classical India.” History of Religions 35, no. 2: 101–23. Reprint, 2004a: 170–92.

Schopen, Gregory (1996). “The Lay Ownership of Monasteries and the Role of the Monk in Mūla­sarvāstivādin Monasticism.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 19, no. 1: 81–126. Reprint, 2004a: 219–59.

Schopen, Gregory (1997). Bones, Stones, and Buddhist Monks: Collected Papers on the Archaeology, Epigraphy, and Texts of Monastic Buddhism in India. Honolulu: University of Hawai’ i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (1999). “The Bones of a Buddha and the Business of a Monk: Conservative Monastic Values in an Early Mahāyāna Polemical Tract.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 27: 279–324. Reprint, 2005a: 63–107.

Schopen, Gregory (2000). “Hierarchy and Housing in a Buddhist Monastic Code: A Translation of the Sanskrit Text of the Śayanāsana­vastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Buddhist Literature 2: 92–196.

Schopen, Gregory (2004a). Buddhist Monks and Business Matters: Still More Papers on Monastic Buddhism in India. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (2004b). “On Buddhist Monks and Dreadful Deities: Some Monastic Devices for Updating the Dharma.” In Gedenkschrift J. W. de Jong, 161–84. Studia Philologica Buddhica: Monograph Series 17. Tokyo: International Institute for Buddhist Studies of the International College for Postgraduate Buddhist Studies. Reprint, 2014: 333–57.

Schopen, Gregory (2005a). Figments and Fragments of Mahāyāna Buddhism in India: More Collected Papers. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (2005b). “Taking the Bodhisattva into Town: More Texts on the Image of ‘the Bodhisattva’ and Image Processions in the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” East and West 55: 299–311. Reprint, 2014: 390–403.

Schopen, Gregory (2007). “The Learned Monk as a Comic Figure: On Reading a Buddhist Vinaya as Indian Literature.” Journal of Indian Philosophy 35: 201–26. Reprint, 2014: 404–31.

Schopen, Gregory (2008). “On Emptying Chamber Pots without Looking and the Urban Location of Buddhist Nunneries in Early India Again.” Journal Asiatique 296.2: 229–56. Reprint, 2014: 23–46.

Schopen, Gregory (2012). “A New Hat for Hārītī: On ‘Giving’ Children for Their Protection to Buddhist Monks and Nuns in Early India.” Little Buddhas: Children and Childhoods in Buddhist Texts and Traditions, 17–42. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Reprint, 2014: 131–56.

Schopen, Gregory (2014). Buddhist Nuns, Monks, and Other Worldly Matters: Recent Papers on Monastic Buddhism in India, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.

Schopen, Gregory (2018). “On Monks and Emergencies: The Brahmanical Principle of Āpad in a Buddhist Monastic Code.” In Reading Slowly: A Festschrift for Jens E. Braarvig, 375–91. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Senart, Émile. Le Mahāvastu, texte sanscrit publié pour la première fois et accompagné d’introductions et d’un commentaire. 3 vols. Paris: Imprimerie Nationale, 1882–97.

Shackleton Bailey, D. R. (1950). “Notes on the Divyāvadāna Part 1.” Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland: 166–84.

Shackleton Bailey, D. R. (1951). “Notes on the Divyāvadāna Part 2.” Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland: 82–102.

Shimoda, Masahiro 下田 正弘. Nehangyō no kenkyū: Daijō kyōten no kenkyū hōhō shiron 涅槃経の研究―大乗経典の研究方法試論 [“A study of the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra with a focus on the methodology of the study of the Mahāyāna sūtras”]. Tokyo: Shunjūsha 春秋社, 1997.

Shōno, Masanori. “Local Buddhist Monastic Agreements among the (Mūla)sarvāstivādins.” Buddhist Studies Review 34, no. 1 (2017): 53–66.

Silk, Jonathan A. Managing Monks: Administrators and Administrative Roles in Indian Buddhist Monasticism. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008.

Skilling, Peter (1994–97). Mahāsūtras. 2 vols. Oxford: The Pali Text Society.

Skilling, Peter (1999). “ ‘Arise, go forth, devote yourselves…’: A verse summary of the teaching of the Buddhas.” In Socially Engaged Buddhism for the New Millennium: Essays in Honor of the Ven. Phra Dhammapitaka (Bhikkhu P.A. Payutto) on His 60th Birthday Anniversary, 440–44. Bangkok: Sathirakoses-Nagapradipa Foundation & Foundation For Children.

Skilling, Peter (2000). “Vasubandhu and the Vyākhyāyukti Literature.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 23, no. 2: 297–350.

Skilling, Peter (2003). “On the Agnihotra­mukhā Yajñāḥ Verses.” In Jainism and Early Buddhism: Essays in Honor of Padmanabh S. Jaini, 637–667. Fremont California: Asian Humanities Press.

Skilling, Peter (2007). “Zombies and Half-Zombies: Mahāsūtras and Other Protective Measures.” The Journal of Pali Text Society 29: 313–30.

Skilling, Peter, and Paul Harrison. “What’s in a Name? Sarvāstivādin Interpretations of the Epithets ‘Buddha’ and ‘Bhagavat.’ ” In Buddhism and Jainism: Essays in Honour of Dr. Hōjun Nagasaki on His Seventieth Birthday, 131–56. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten, 2005.

Steinthal, Paul. Udāna. London: Pali Text Society, 1982.

Straube, Martin (2006). Prinz Sudhana und die Kinnarī: Eine buddhistische Liebesgeschichte von Kṣemendra Texte, Übersetzung, Studie. Indica et Tibetica Band 46. Marburg: Indica et Tibetica Verlag.

Straube, Martin (2009). Studien zur Bodhisattvāvadānakalpalatā: Texte und Quellen der Parallelen zu Haribhaṭṭas Jātakamālā. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Strong, John (1983). “Filial Piety and Buddhism: The Indian Antecedents to a ‘Chinese’ problem.” In Traditions in Contact and Change: Selected Proceedings of the XIVth Congress of the International Association for the History of Religions, 171–86, 699–701. Waterloo, Ont.: Wilfrid Laurier University Press.

Strong, John (1992). The Legend and Cult of Upagupta: Sanskrit Buddhism in North India and Southeast Asia. Princeton: Princeton University Press.

Sugimoto, Takushū 杉本 卓洲 (1978). “Kashō butsu no tō 迦葉仏の塔 [The stupa of the Buddha Kāśyapa].” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 印度學佛教學研究 27, no. 1: 202–06.

Sugimoto, Takushū (1981). “Mu’uai (shi heno shōdō) to jisatsu: genshi bukkyō ni okeru jisatsukan 無有愛（死への衝動）と自殺―原始仏教における自殺観― [Impulse toward death and suicide: the early Buddhist view of suicide].” Journal of “bukkyō fukushi” 佛教福祉 7: 4–33.

Sugimoto, Takushū (1993). Bosatsu: Jātaka karano tankyū 菩薩–-ジャータカからの探求–- [“Bodhisattva: Explorations of the Jātakas”]. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten 平樂寺書店.

Takakusu, Junjirō 高楠順次郎, and Watanabe Kaikyoku 渡辺海旭, ed. Taishō shinshū daizōkyō 大正新脩大藏經. 100 vols. Tokyo: Taishō Issaikyō Kankōkai 大正一切經刊行會, 1924–34.

Takubo, Shūyo 田久保 周誉. Bombun Kujakumyō’ōkyō 梵文孔雀明王經 [Ārya Mahā-Māyūrī Vidyā-Rājñī]. Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林, 1972.

Tamai, Tatsushi. “The Tocharian Mūgapakkha-Jūtaka.” Annual Report of The International Research Institute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka University 20 (2017): 251–75.

Tanabe, Kazuko. 田辺 和子 (1981). “Paññāsa-jātaka chū no Sudhana-jātaka (I), Paññāsa-jātaka 中の Sudhana-jātaka (I) [The Sudhana-jātaka in the Paññāsa-jātaka (I).” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 10: 99–126.

Tanabe, Kazuko (1983). “Paññāsa-jātaka chū no Sudhana-jātaka (II), Paññāsa-jātaka 中の Sudhana-jātaka (II) [The Sudhana-jātaka in the Paññāsa-jātaka (II)].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 13: 105–21.

Tatelman, Joel (2000). The Glorious Deeds of Pūrṇa: A Translation and Study of the Pūrṇāvadāna. Surrey: Curzon Press.

Tatelman, Joel (2005). The Heavenly Exploits: Buddhist Biographies from the Divyāvadāna Volume One. New York: New York University Press.

Teiser, Stephen F. Reinventing the Wheel: Paintings of Rebirth in Medieval Buddhist Temples. Seattle & London: University of Washington Press, 2006.

Tournier, Vincent. La formation du Mahāvastu et la mise en place des conceptions relatives à la carrière du bodhisattva. Paris: École française d’Extrême-Orient, 2017.

Trenckner, V., Robert Chalmers, and C.A.F. Rhys Davids. [1888–1925]. Majjhima-nikāya. 4 vols. Reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1974–79.

Trenckner, V. et al. A Critical Pali Dictionary. 3 vols. Copenhagen: The Royal Danish Academy of Sciences and Letters, 1924–92.

Tsai, Yao-ming 蔡 耀明. “Ji’erjite (Gilgit) fanwen fodian xieben de chutu yu fojiao yanjiu 吉爾吉特 (Gilgit) 梵文佛典寫本的出土與佛教研究 [The emergence of the Gilgit Sanskrit Buddhist manuscripts and Buddhist studies].” Zhengguan 正觀 13 (2000): 2–126.

Tsuchida, Ryūtaro. “Two Categories of Brahmins in the Early Buddhist Period.” The Memoirs of the Research Department of the Toyo Bunko 49 (1991): 51–95.

Tucci, Giuseppe. “Preliminary report on an archaeological survey in Swat.” East and West 9, no. 4 (1958): 279–328.

Vira, Raghu, and Lokesh Chandra (1959–74). Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts. 10 vols. Śata-piṭaka Series 10. New Delhi: International Academy of Indian Culture.

Vira, Raghu, and Lokesh Chandra (1995). Gilgit Buddhist Manuscripts. 3 vols. Bibliotheca Indo-Buddhica Series 150–52. Delhi: Sri Satguru Publications.

Vogel, J.Ph. Indian Serpent-Lore or the Nāgas in Hindu Legend and Art. Varanasi: Indological Book House, 1972.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (1984). “Some Hitherto Unidentified Fragments of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit.” Nachrichten der Akademie der Wissenschaften in Göttingen, Philologisch-Historische Klasse 1984, no. 7: 299–337.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (1992). “Some More Fragments of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neu-entdeckungen und Neu-editionen. Folge 2: 65–109. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden, Beiheft 4. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (1996).“The Final Leaves of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit. Part 1: Saṃgharakṣitāvadāna.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen. Folge 3, 241–96. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden, Beiheft 6. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (2002). “The Final Leaves of the Pravrajyāvastu Portion of the Vinayavastu Manuscript Found Near Gilgit. Part 2: Nāgakumārāvadāna and Lévi Text.” In Sanskrit-Texte aus dem buddhistischen Kanon: Neuentdeckungen und Neueditionen. Folge 4, 11–76. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Beiheft 9. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.

Vogel, Claus, and Klaus Wille (2014). “The Pravrajyāvastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen. Last visited on November 2, 2020.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1948). “Wunderkräfte des Buddha: Eine Episode im Sanskrittext des Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra.” Nachrichten der Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen 1948: 48–91. Reprint, Von Ceylon bis Turfan: Schriften zur Geschichte, Literatur, Religion und Kunst des indischen Kulturraumes, 120–63. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1967.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1950–51). Das Mahāparinirvāṇasūtra: Text in Sanskrit und Tibetisch, verglichen mit dem Pāli nebst einer Übersetzung der chinesischen Entsprechung im Vinaya der Mūla­sarvāstivādins. 3 vols. Berlin: Akademie-Verlag, 1950–51. Reprint, Kyoto: Rinsen Book Co., 1986.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1980). “The Rāṣṭrapālasūtra in Sanskrit Remnants from Central Asia.” Indianisme et bouddhisme: Mélanges offerts à Mgr. Étienne Lamotte, 359–74, Louvain: Université catholique de Louvain, Institut orientaliste Louvain-la-Neuve. Reprint, 1989.

Waldschmidt, Ernst (1989). Ausgewählte kleine Schriften. Edited by Heinz Bechert und Petra Kieffer-Pülz. Stuttgart: Steiner Verlag.

Waldschmidt, Ernst et al. Sanskrit-Wörterbuch der buddhistischen Texte aus den Turfan-Funden. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1973–2018.

Walleser, Max, and Hermann Kopp. Manoratha-pūraṇī: Commentary on the Aṅguttara Nikāya. 5 vols. 1924–56. Second ed. and reprint, London: Pali Text Society, 1966–79.

Wille, Klaus (1990). Die handschriftliche Überlieferung des Vinayavastu der Mūla­sarvāstivādin. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner Verlag.

Wille, Klaus (2014a). “Survey of the Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Turfan Collection (Berlin).” In Harrison and Hartmann ed. 2014: 187–211.

Wille, Klaus (2014b). “Survey of the Identified Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Hoernle, Stein, and Skrine Collections of the British Library (London).” In Harrison and Hartmann ed. 2014: 223–46.

Wogihara, Unrai. Sphuṭārthā Abhidharmakośa­vyākhyā. Tokyo: Sankibō Busshorin, 1936.

Wu, Juan (2016). “The Rootless Faith of Ajātaśatru and Its Explanations in the *Abhidharma-mahā­vibhāṣā.” Indo-Iranian Journal 59: 101–138.

Wu, Juan (2017). “Parallel Stories in the Āvaśyakacūrṇi and the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya: A Preliminary Investigation.” Journal of the American Oriental Society 137, no. 2: 315–47.

Yajima, Michihiko 矢島 道彦. “Suttanipāta taiōku sakuin, Suttanipāta 対応句索引 [An index to parallel verses and padas of the Suttanipāta collected from Buddhist, Jain, and Brahmanical texts].” Bulletin of the Institute of Buddhist Culture Tsurumi University 2 (1997): A1–A97.

Yamabe, Nobuyoshi. “The Paths of Śrāvakas and Bodhisattvas in Meditative Practices.” Acta Asiatica 96 (2009): 47–75.

Yamada, Ryūjō 山田 龍城. Bongo butten no shobunken: Daijō bukkyō seiritsuron josetsu shiryōhen 梵語佛典の諸文献: 大乗佛教成立論序説 資料篇 [“Materials of Sanskrit Buddhist literature: prolegomenon to the establishment of Mahayana Buddhism”]. Kyoto: Heirakuji shoten 平樂寺書店, 1959.

Yamagiwa, Nobuyuki 山極 伸之. “Shoki bukkyō kyōdan ni okeru shoku no juyō 初期仏教教団における食の受容–-浄地をめぐる諸問題–- [The acceptance of food in the early Buddhist monastic community: problems about kappiyabhūmi/kalpikaśālā].” In Ishigami Zennō kyōju koki kinen ronbunshū: bukkyō bunka no kichō to tenkai 石上善應教授古稀記念論文集 仏教文化の基調と展開 [“Festschrift for Professor Zennō Ishigami on the occasion of his seventieth birthday: the basis and development of Buddhist culture”], 307–22, Tokyo: Sankibō busshorin 山喜房佛書林, 2001.

Yamanaka, Yukio 山中 行雄, Tsutomu Yamashita 山下 勤, Ritsu Akahane 赤羽 律, and Yasutaka Muroya 室屋 安孝 (2011). “Bukkyō bunken ‘Ryōjibyō kyō’ to sono kanren bunken ni tsuite 仏教文献『療痔病経』とその関連文献について [A study of ‘The Sūtra of the Tranquilization of Hemorrhoids’ and other relevant material].” Nihon ishigaku zasshi 日本医史学雑誌 57, no. 3: 293–304.

Yamanaka, Yukio (2012). “Bukkyō bunken ‘Ryōjibyō kyō’ no haikei ni tsuite 仏教文献『療痔病経』の背景について [A study of the Arśapraśamaṇisūtra: Analysis].” Nihon ishigaku zasshi 日本医史学雑誌 58, no. 1: 39–51.

Yao, Fumi 八尾 史 (2007). “Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu ni okeru kyōten inyō no mondai: Mahādevasūtra no jirei, 根本説一切有部律における経典引用の問題―Mahādevasūtraの事例 [On the Mahādevasūtra quoted in the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 35: 195–215.

Yao, Fumi (2010). “ ‘Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu’ yakuji ni okeru kyōten ‘inyō’ no shosō: ‘Nehangyō’ taiō bubun wo chūshin ni 『根本説一切有部律』「薬事」における経典「引用」の諸相―「涅槃経」対応部分を中心に, [Sutras quoted in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya: with a focus on the parallel part to the Mahā­parinirvāṇa­sūtra].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 38: 251–79.

Yao, Fumi (2011). ‘Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu’ yakuji ni okeru kyōten ‘inyō’ no shosō 2, 『 根本説一切有部律』「薬事」における経典「引用」の諸相（二） [Sutras quoted in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya (2)].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 (國際佛教徒協會) 39: 179–99.

Yao, Fumi (2012a). “ ‘Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu’ yakuji ni okeru kyōten ‘inyō’ no shosō 3, 『根本説一切有部律』「薬事」における経典「引用」の諸相（三） [Sutras quoted in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya (3)].” Buddhist Studies 佛教研究 40: 291–318.

Yao, Fumi (2012b). “Problems in the sTog Palace Manuscript of the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 60, no. 3: 1189–93.

Yao, Fumi (2013a). Konponsetsuissaiuburitsu yakuji 根本説一切有部律薬事 [“The Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya” (annotated Japanese translation)]. Tokyo: Rengō shuppan 連合出版.

Yao, Fumi (2013b). “A Brief Note on the Newly Found Sanskrit Fragments of the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūla­sarvāstivāda-vinaya.” Journal of Indian and Buddhist Studies 61, no. 3: 72–77.

Yao, Fumi (2015). “A Preliminary Report on the Newly Found Sanskrit Manuscript Fragments of the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Indian Logic 8, 289–303.

Yao, Fumi (2017). “Dharmadinnā Becomes a Nun: A Story of Ordination by Messenger from the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, Translated from the Tibetan version.” Asian Literature and Translation 4, no. 1: 105–48.

Yao, Fumi (2018). “Two Sanskrit Manuscripts of the Mūla­sarvāstivādin Bhaiṣajyavastu from Gilgit.” WIAS Research Bulletin 10: 91–102.

Yao, Fumi (Forthcoming a.) “Traces of Incorporation: Some Examples of the Saṃyuktāgama Sūtras in the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” In Research on the Saṃyukta-āgama. Taipei: Dharma Drum Publishing Corporation

Yao, Fumi (Forthcoming b.) “The Formation of the Buddha’s Former Life Stories in the Bhaiṣajyavastu of the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya.” Journal of the International Association of Buddhist Studies 42.

Zin, Monika, (2004). “The Mūkapaṅgu Story in the Madras Government Museum: The Problem of the Textual Affiliations of the Narrative Reliefs in Amaravati and Nagarjunakonda.” Annali, Università degli studi di Napoli “L’Orientale” 64: 157–80.

Zin, Monika, (2006a). Mitleid und Wunderkraft: Schwierige Bekehrungen und ihre Ikonographie im indischen Buddhismus. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.

Zin, Monika, (2006b). “About Two Rocks in the Buddha’s Life Story.” East and West 56, no. 4: 329–58.

Zin, Monika, (2012). “Māndhātar, the Universal Monarch, and the Meaning of Representations of the Cakravartin in the Amaravati School, and of the Kings on the Kanaganahalli Stūpa.” In Buddhist Narrative in Asia and Beyond: In Honour of HRH Princess Maha Chakri Sirindhorn on Her Fifty-Fifth Birth Anniversary:149–64. Bangkok: Institute of Thai Studies, Chulalongkorn University.

Table of Contents

Search this text

Spotted a mistake?

Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.

How to cite this text

The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

84000. The Chapter on Medicines (Bhaiṣajya­vastu, sman gyi gzhi, Toh 1-6). Translated by Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team. Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025. https://84000.co/translation/toh1-6/UT22084-001-006-end-notes.Copy
84000. The Chapter on Medicines (Bhaiṣajya­vastu, sman gyi gzhi, Toh 1-6). Translated by Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2025, 84000.co/translation/toh1-6/UT22084-001-006-end-notes.Copy
84000. (2025) The Chapter on Medicines (Bhaiṣajya­vastu, sman gyi gzhi, Toh 1-6). (Bhaiṣajyavastu Translation Team, Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh1-6/UT22084-001-006-end-notes.Copy
Sponsor Translation